3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide www.3Com.com Part Number: 10015463 Rev.
Copyright © 2006, 3Com Corporation. All rights reserved. No part of this documentation may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative work (such as translation, transformation, or adaptation) without written permission from 3Com Corporation. 3Com Corporation reserves the right to revise this documentation and to make changes in content from time to time without obligation on the part of 3Com Corporation to provide notification of such revision or change.
Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – CLI Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 CLI Configuration Commands.................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 CLI Configuration Commands ........................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 command-privilege level ......................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.2 display history-command ..............
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – CLI Chapter 1 CLI Configuration Commands Chapter 1 CLI Configuration Commands 1.1 CLI Configuration Commands 1.1.1 command-privilege level Syntax command-privilege level level view view command undo command-privilege view view command View System view Parameter level: Command Level. This argument ranges from 0 to 3. view: Command view. This argument can be any command view the switch supports. command: Command to be specified.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – CLI Chapter 1 CLI Configuration Commands 1.1.2 display history-command Syntax display history-command View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display history-command command to display history commands. All the history commands are saved in the history command cache. When the history command cache is full, the old information in it will be overlaid. Related command: history-command max-size. Example # Display history commands.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – CLI Chapter 1 CLI Configuration Commands well to switch to the higher user level. You will remain in the original user level if you fail to provide the correct password. Note that: z Users logging into a switch also fall into four levels, each of which corresponding to one of the command levels. Users at a specific level can only use the commands at the same level and the commands at the lower levels.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – CLI Chapter 1 CLI Configuration Commands password: Password to be set. If you specify the simple keyword, provide this argument in plain text. If you specify the cipher keyword, you can provide this argument in either encrypted text or plain text.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 Login Commands ........................................................................................................ 1-1 1.1 Login Commands............................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 authentication-mode................................................................................................ 1-1 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 1 Login Commands Chapter 1 Login Commands 1.1 Login Commands 1.1.1 authentication-mode Syntax authentication-mode { password | scheme [ command-authorization ] | none } View User interface view Parameter password: Authenticates users using the local password. scheme: Authenticates users locally or remotely using usernames and passwords. command-authorization: Performs command authorization on TACACS authentication server.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 1 Login Commands Example # Configure to authenticate users using the local password on the AUX interface. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] user-interface aux 0 [3Com-ui-aux0] authentication-mode password 1.1.2 auto-execute command Syntax auto-execute command text undo auto-execute command View User interface view Parameter text: Command to be executed automatically.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 1 Login Commands Example # Configure the telnet 10.110.100.1 command to be executed automatically after users log into VTY 0. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] user-interface vty 0 [3Com-ui-vty0] auto-execute command telnet 10.110.100.1 % This action will lead to configuration failure through ui-vty0. Are you sure?[Y/N]y 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 1 Login Commands View Any view Parameter type: User interface type. number: User interface number. summary: Displays the summary information about a user interface. Description Use the display user-interface command to display the information about a specified user interface or all user interfaces.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 1 Login Commands Filed Description Tx/Rx Transmission speed of the user interface Modem Indicates whether or not a modem is used. Privi Available command level Auth Authentication mode Int Physical position of the user interface A The current user is authenticated by AAA. N Users are not authenticated. P Users need to provide passwords to pass the authentication. # Display the summary information about the user interface.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 1 Login Commands <3Com> display users UI F 0 1 AUX 0 VTY 0 Delay Type Ipaddress Username 00:00:00 00:06:08 TEL Userlevel 3 192.168.0.3 + : Current operation user. F : Current operation user work in async mode.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 1 Login Commands Description Use the flow-control command to configure the flow control mode of the user interface. Use the undo flow-control command to restore the default flow control mode of the user interface. By default, flow control is not performed. This command can only be executed in AUX user interface view. Example # Set flow control mode to software flow control. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 1 Login Commands After you execute this command, user interface VTY 0 will be disconnected. The user in it must log in again to connect to the switch. 1.1.8 header Syntax header [ incoming | login | shell ] text undo header { incoming | login | shell } View System view Parameter Incoming: Sets the login banner for users that log in through modems.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 1 Login Commands You can specify the banner in the following three ways, each of which requires that the first character and the last character of the banner be the same. z Enter the banner in multiple lines. If you only type one character in the first line of a banner, the character and the last character do not act as part of the banner. The following gives an example of this way.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 1 Login Commands (The beginning and end characters of the banner are not displayed.) <3Com> Option 2: Enter the banner in multiple lines. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] header shell %SHELL: (Following appears after you press :) Input banner text, and quit with the character '%'.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 1 Login Commands Use the undo history-command max-size command to revert to the default history command buffer size. Example # Set the size of the history command buffer of AUX 0 to 20 to enable it to store up to 20 commands. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] user-interface aux 0 [3Com-ui-aux0] history-command max-size 20 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 1 Login Commands 1.1.11 lock Syntax lock View User view Parameter None Description Use the lock command to lock the current user interface to prevent unauthorized operations in the user interface. With the execution of this command, the system prompts to enter and confirm the password, and then locks the user interface. You can set the password in the range of 1 to 16 characters. Enter the correct password to cancel the lock.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 1 Login Commands Description Use the modem command to configure the both attribute of the Modem. Use the undo modem command to disable the both configuration. Both call in and call out are allowed when the modem command is executed without any keyword. Both call in and call out are disabled when the undo modem command is executed without any keyword. The command can only be executed in AUX user interface view.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 1 Login Commands [3Com] user-interface aux 0 [3Com>-ui-aux0] modem auto-answer 1.1.14 modem timer answer Syntax modem timer answer seconds undo modem timer answer View User interface view Parameter seconds: Waiting timeout time, in seconds, ranging from 1 to 60.The default value is 30 seconds. Description Use the modem timer answer to configure the carrier detection timeout time after off-hook during call-in connection setup.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 1 Login Commands none: Does not check. odd: Performs odd checks. space: Performs space checks. Description Use the parity command to set the check mode of the user interface. Use the undo parity command to revert to the default check mode. Use these two commands in AUX user interface view only. No check is performed by default. Example # Set to perform even checks. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 1 Login Commands System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] user-interface vty 0 [3Com-ui-vty0] protocol inbound ssh 1.1.17 screen-length Syntax screen-length screen-length undo screen-length View User interface view Parameter screen-length: Number of lines the screen can contain. This argument ranges from 0 to 512 and defaults to 24.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 1 Login Commands Parameter all: Sends messages to all user interfaces. type: User interface type. number: Absolute or relative index of the user interface. Description Use the send command to send messages to a specified user interface or all user interfaces. Example # Send “hello” to all user interfaces. <3Com> send all Enter message, end with CTRL+Z or Enter; abort with CTRL+C: hello^Z Send message? [Y/N]y 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 1 Login Commands Description Use the service-type command to specify the login type and the corresponding available command level. Use the undo service-type command to cancel login type configuration.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 1 Login Commands telnet Establish one TELNET connection tracert Trace route function undo Cancel current setting 1.1.20 set authentication password Syntax set authentication password { cipher | simple } password undo set authentication password View User interface view Parameter cipher: Specifies to display the local password in encrypted text when you display the current configuration.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 1 Login Commands Example # Set the local password of VTY 0 to “123”. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] user-interface vty 0 [3Com-ui-vty0] set authentication password simple 123 1.1.21 shell Syntax shell undo shell View User interface view Parameter None Description Use the shell command to make terminal services available for the user interface.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 1 Login Commands 1.1.22 speed Syntax speed speed-value undo speed View User interface view Parameter speed-value: Transmission speed (in bps). This argument can be 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19,200, 38,400, 57,600, and 115,200 and defaults to 9,600. Description Use the speed command to set the transmission speed of the user interface. Use the undo speed command to revert to the default transmission speed.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 1 Login Commands Description Use the stopbits command to set the stop bits of the user interface. Use the undo stopbits command to revert to the default stop bits. Use these two commands in the AUX user interface only. By default, the stop bits is 1. Note: Changing the value of the stop bits does not affect the communications. Example # Set the stop bits to 2. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 1 Login Commands <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] sysname ABC [ABC] 1.1.25 telnet Syntax telnet { hostname | ip-address } [ service-port ] View User view Parameter hostname: Host name of the remote switch. You can use the ip host command to assign a host name to a switch. ip-address: IP address of the remote switch. service-port: TCP port number of the port that provides Telnet service on the switch.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 1 Login Commands View System view Parameter type: User interface type. first-number: User interface index, which identifies the first user interface to be configured. last-number: User interface index, which identifies the last user interface to be configured. Description Use the user-interface command to enter one or more user interface views to perform configuration. Example # Enter VTY 0 user interface view.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 1 Login Commands Example # Configure that commands of level 0 are available to the users logging into VTY 0. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] user-interface vty 0 [3Com-ui-vty0] user privilege level 0 # You can verify the above configuration by Telneting to VTY 0 and displaying the available commands, as listed in the following.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 2 Commands for User Control Chapter 2 Commands for User Control 2.1 Commands for Controlling Logging in Users 2.1.1 acl Syntax acl acl-number { inbound | outbound } undo acl { inbound | outbound } View User interface view Parameter acl-number: ACL number ranging from 2,000 to 3,999. inbound: Filters the users Telneting to the current switch. outbound: Filters the users Telneting to other switches from the current switch.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 2 Commands for User Control View System view Parameter read: Specifies that the community has read-only permission in the specified view. Write: Specifies that the community has read/write permission in the specified view. community-name: Community name. A string ranges from 1 to 32 characters. mib-view: Sets the name of the MIB view accessible to the community. view-name: MIB view name, 1 to 32 characters long.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 2 Commands for User Control View System view Parameter v1: Specifies to adopt v1 security scheme. v2c: Specifies to adopt v2c security scheme. v3: Specifies to adopt v3 security scheme. group-name: Group name. This argument can be of 1 to 32 characters. authentication: Specifies to authenticate SNMP data without encrypting the data. privacy: Authenticates and encrypts packets. read-view: Sets a read-only view.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 2 Commands for User Control 2.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Login Chapter 2 Commands for User Control Description Use the snmp-agent usm-user command to add a user to a specified SNMP group. You can also optionally use this command to apply an ACL to filter network management users. Use the undo snmp-agent usm-user command to remove a user from the corresponding SNMP group. The operation also frees the user from the corresponding ACL-related configuration.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Configuration File Management Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 Configuration File Management Commands ............................................................ 1-1 1.1 Configuration File Management Commands ..................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 display current-configuration ................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.2 display saved-configuration......
3Com Switch 7750 Series Chapter 1 Configuration File Management Command Reference Guide – Configuration File Management Commands Chapter 1 Configuration File Management Commands 1.1 Configuration File Management Commands 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Chapter 1 Configuration File Management Command Reference Guide – Configuration File Management Commands exclude: Displays the configuration excluding the specified characters. include: Displays the configuration including the specified characters. text: Text included in a configuration item, expressed in a regular expression. .
3Com Switch 7750 Series Chapter 1 Configuration File Management Command Reference Guide – Configuration File Management Commands Description Use the display current-configuration command to display the currently effective configuration parameters of the switch. By default, if some running configuration parameters are the same with the default operational parameters, they will not be displayed.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Chapter 1 Configuration File Management Command Reference Guide – Configuration File Management Commands vlan 1 # vlan 2 # interface Vlan-interface1 # interface Vlan-interface2 ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Chapter 1 Configuration File Management Command Reference Guide – Configuration File Management Commands # View configuration information of all the VLANs. <3Com> display current-configuration vlan # vlan 1 description TestVlan1 igmp-snooping enable # vlan 10 description testVlan10 igmp-snooping enable # vlan 100 description testVlan100 # vlan 1000 description testVlan1000 # return # View configuration information of the VLAN1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Chapter 1 Configuration File Management Command Reference Guide – Configuration File Management Commands interface Ethernet2/0/1 network 10.1.1.0 0.0.0.255 # View configuration information beginning with “user”. <3Com> display current-configuration | include ^user user-interface aux 0 user-interface vty 0 4 # View the configuration information except the port configuration.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Chapter 1 Configuration File Management Command Reference Guide – Configuration File Management Commands 1.1.2 display saved-configuration Syntax display saved-configuration View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display saved-configuration command to view the configuration files saved in the flash memory of the Ethernet Switch.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Chapter 1 Configuration File Management Command Reference Guide – Configuration File Management Commands # ospf 1 # ip route-static 10.12.0.0 255.255.0.0 Ethernet 12/0/0 # user-interface con 0 user-interface aux 0 user-interface vty 0 4 authentication-mode none # return The configurations listed above are global configuration, port configuration and user interface configuration respectively. 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Chapter 1 Configuration File Management Command Reference Guide – Configuration File Management Commands Example # Display the running configuration parameters in system view. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] display this # sysname 3Com S6506R # ftp server enable ftp timeout 36 # local-server nas-ip 127.0.0.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Chapter 1 Configuration File Management Command Reference Guide – Configuration File Management Commands Related command: startup saved-configuration. Example # Display the configuration filenames used for the current and the next start-ups. <3Com> display startup MainBoard: Startup saved-configuration file: flash:/vrpcfg.cfg Next startup saved-configuration file: flash:/vrpcfg.cfg 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Chapter 1 Configuration File Management Command Reference Guide – Configuration File Management Commands <3Com> reset saved-configuration The saved configuration will be erased. Are you sure?[Y/N]y Configuration in flash memory is being cleared. Please wait ... .... Configuration in flash memory is cleared. 1.1.6 save Syntax save [ file-name | safely ] View User view Parameter file-name: File name with the extension name “.cfg”, a character string of 5 to 56 characters.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Chapter 1 Configuration File Management Command Reference Guide – Configuration File Management Commands Example # Get the current configuration files stored in the flash memory. <3Com> save The configuration will be written to the device. Are you sure?[Y/N]y Now saving current configuration to the device. Saving configuration flash:/vrpcfg.cfg. Please wait... ........... Configuration is saved to flash memory successfully. 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VLAN Commands Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 VLAN Configuration Commands................................................................................ 1-1 1.1 VLAN Configuration Commands........................................................................................ 1-1 1.1.1 broadcast-suppression............................................................................................ 1-1 1.1.2 description ......................
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VLAN Commands Chapter 1 VLAN Configuration Commands Chapter 1 VLAN Configuration Commands 1.1 VLAN Configuration Commands 1.1.1 broadcast-suppression Syntax broadcast-suppression { ratio | pps pps } undo broadcast-suppression View VLAN view Parameter ratio: Specifies the bandwidth ratio for the maximum broadcast traffic in specific VLAN. Its value ranges from 1 to 100 and defaults to 100.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VLAN Commands Chapter 1 VLAN Configuration Commands 1.1.2 description Syntax description { string | text } undo description View VLAN view, VLAN interface view Parameter string: Contiguous string describing the VLAN. It contains 1 to 32 characters without space. The default value is the VLAN ID, for example, “VLAN 0001”. text: Text describing the VLAN interface. It contains 1 to 80 characters and space is allowed.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VLAN Commands Chapter 1 VLAN Configuration Commands Parameter vlan-id: ID of the specific VLAN interface.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VLAN Commands Chapter 1 VLAN Configuration Commands 1.1.4 display vlan Syntax display vlan [ vlan-id [ to vlan-id ] | all | static | dynamic ] View Any view Parameter vlan-id: Specifies the VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094. to: Specifies multiple contiguous VLAN IDs. all: Specifies to display the information about all the VLANs. static: Specifies to display the VLANs created statically. dynamic: Specifies to display the VLANs created dynamically.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VLAN Commands Chapter 1 VLAN Configuration Commands Untagged Ports: Ethernet3/0/30 Table 1-2 Description of the fields of the display vlan command z z z z z z z z z Field z VLA N ID VLA N Type Rout e Interf ace z VLAN ID z VLAN type (dynamic or static) z Desc riptio n Nam e Broa dcast MAX -ratio Tagg ed Ports Whether the routing interface function is enable for this VLAN z Description on the VLAN z VLAN name z VLAN broadcast storm s
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VLAN Commands Chapter 1 VLAN Configuration Commands Description Use the interface Vlan-interface command to create a VLAN interface or enter VLAN interface view. Use the undo interface Vlan-interface command to delete the VLAN interface. Related command: display interface Vlan-interface. Example # Enter Vlan-interface 1 view <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] interface Vlan-interface 1 [3Com-Vlan-interface1] 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VLAN Commands Chapter 1 VLAN Configuration Commands 1.1.7 shutdown Syntax shutdown undo shutdown View VLAN interface view Parameter None Description Use the shutdown command to disable a VLAN interface. Use the undo shutdown command to enable a VLAN interface. By default, a VLAN interface is enabled.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VLAN Commands Chapter 1 VLAN Configuration Commands View System view Parameter vlan-id: ID of the VLAN that you want to enter. Its value ranges from 1 to 4094. to: Specifies the range of VLANs to be removed. all: Specifies to remove all VLANs. Description Use the vlan command to enter a VLAN view. If the VLAN identified by the vlan-id argument does not exist, this command creates the VLAN and then enters the VLAN view.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VLAN Commands Chapter 1 VLAN Configuration Commands View System view Parameter vlan-id: ID of the initial VLAN to be created, in the range of 1 to 4,094. to: Specifies the range of VLANs. vlan-id2: ID of the terminal VLAN to be created, in the range of 1 to 4,094, no smaller than the vlan-id1 argument. Description Use the vlan to command to create multiple VLANs in batch. Use the undo vlan to command to remove multiple VLANs in batch.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VLAN Commands Chapter 1 VLAN Configuration Commands 1.1.10 vlan all Syntax vlan all undo vlan all View System view Parameter None Description Use the vlan all command to create all the VLANs, namely, VLAN 2 to VLAN 4,094. Use the undo vlan all command to remove all the VLANs. Caution: z VLAN 1 is the default VLAN, which need not be created and cannot be removed.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VLAN Commands Chapter 1 VLAN Configuration Commands This may delete all static VLAN except the VLAN kept by protocol and the default VLAN. Continue?[Y/N]:y This operation may take a few minutes. Please wait... Can't delete vlan when shared-vlan enabled! Can't delete vlan when voice vlan enabled Cannot delete remote probe VLAN Fail to delete VLAN: 2, 5, 20 Done. 1.2 Port-Based VLAN Configuration Commands 1.2.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VLAN Commands Chapter 1 VLAN Configuration Commands Caution: The port command is only applicable to access ports. To add trunk ports and hybrid ports to a VLAN, you can use the port trunk permit vlan and port hybrid vlan commands in Ethernet port view. For related command information, refer to the Port Basic Configuration Command section of the 3Com Switch 7750 Command Reference Guide. Related command: display vlan.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VLAN Commands Chapter 1 VLAN Configuration Commands Example # Display protocol information and protocol index configured for Ethernet1/0/1 and Ethernet1/0/2 ports. <3Com> display protocol-vlan interface Ethernet 1/0/1 to Ethernet 1/0/2 Interface: Ethernet1/0/1 VLAN ID Protocol-Index Protocol-type 50 1 ip 192.168.10.1 255.255.255.0 80 2 ip 101.120.34.0 255.255.0.0 100 1 ip 104.232.43.0 255.255.255.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VLAN Commands Chapter 1 VLAN Configuration Commands 4 3 ip 172.168.0.1 255.255.0.0 4 4 ip 172.168.1.1 255.255.255.0 1.3.3 display protocol-vlan vlan Syntax display protocol-vlan vlan { vlan-id [ to vlan-id ] | all } View Any view Parameter vlan-id: VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094. to: Specifies the range of VLAN IDs. all: Specifies all VLANs.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VLAN Commands Chapter 1 VLAN Configuration Commands 1.3.4 port hybrid protocol-vlan vlan Syntax port hybrid protocol-vlan vlan vlan-id { protocol-index [ to protocol-end ] | all } undo port hybrid protocol-vlan vlan vlan-id { protocol-index [ to protocol-end ] | all } View Ethernet port view Parameter vlan-id: VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094. to: Specifies the range for VLAN IDs. protocol-index: Beginning protocol index, ranging from 0 to 6.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VLAN Commands Chapter 1 VLAN Configuration Commands View System view Parameter vlan-id: VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4094. protocol-index: Beginning protocol index, ranging from 0 to 6. Its value must be smaller than or equal to the value of the protocol-end argument. protocol-end: End protocol index, ranging from 0 to 6. Note that its value must be larger than or equal to the value of the protocol-index argument. all: Specifies all protocol indices.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VLAN Commands Chapter 1 VLAN Configuration Commands Example # Associate protocols 0 to 6 in VLAN3 with board 5. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] protocol-vlan vlan 3 0 to 6 slot 5 1.3.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VLAN Commands Chapter 1 VLAN Configuration Commands protocol-end: End protocol index, ranging from 0 to 6. Note that its value must be larger than or equal to the value of the protocol-index argument. all: Specifies all protocol indices. Description Use the protocol-vlan command to configure the protocol template used for classifying protocol-based VLANs. Use the undo protocol-vlan command to cancel the configuration.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VLAN Commands Chapter 1 VLAN Configuration Commands <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] vlan 3 [3Com-vlan3] protocol-vlan ip # Configure VLAN 5 as a VLAN based on network segment 123.34.56.0. [3Com-vlan3] vlan 5 [3Com-vlan5] protocol-vlan ip 123.34.56.0 # Cancel protocols 0 to 5 in VLAN 5.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Extended VLAN Applications Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 Voice VLAN Configuration Commands ..................................................................... 1-1 1.1 Voice VLAN Configuration Commands ............................................................................. 1-1 1.1.1 display voice vlan oui .............................................................................................. 1-1 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Extended VLAN Applications Chapter 1 Voice VLAN Configuration Commands Chapter 1 Voice VLAN Configuration Commands 1.1 Voice VLAN Configuration Commands 1.1.1 display voice vlan oui Syntax display voice vlan oui View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display voice vlan oui command to display the currently supported OUI addresses and the related information. Related command: voice vlan voice, vlan enable.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Extended VLAN Applications Chapter 1 Voice VLAN Configuration Commands Parameter None Description Use the display voice vlan status command to display voice VLAN-related information, including voice VLAN status (disabled/enabled), security mode, aging time, port mode (manual mode or automatic mode), and so on. Related command: voice vlan, voice vlan enable. Example # Display the information about the voice VLAN.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Extended VLAN Applications Chapter 1 Voice VLAN Configuration Commands Caution: The “Current voice vlan enable port mode” field lists the ports with the voice VLAN function enabled. Note that a port listed in this field may not currently operate in a voice VLAN. To check the ports operating in the current voice VLAN, use the display vlan command, which is described in section1.1.3 ”display vlan”. 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Extended VLAN Applications Chapter 1 Voice VLAN Configuration Commands 1.1.4 voice vlan Syntax voice vlan vlan-id enable undo voice vlan enable View System view Parameter vlan-id: ID of the VLAN that needs to be enabled with the voice VLAN function, ranging from 2 to 4094. Description Use the voice vlan command to enable the voice VLAN function globally. Use the undo voice vlan enable command to disable the voice VLAN function globally.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Extended VLAN Applications Chapter 1 Voice VLAN Configuration Commands 1.1.5 voice vlan aging Syntax voice vlan aging minutes undo voice vlan aging View System view Parameter minutes: Aging time (in minutes) to be set for a voice VLAN. This argument ranges from 5 to 43,200 and defaults to 1,440. Description Use the voice vlan aging command to set the aging time for a voice VLAN.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Extended VLAN Applications Chapter 1 Voice VLAN Configuration Commands Use the undo voice vlan enable command to disable the voice VLAN function for a port. z The voice VLAN function takes effect on a port only when it is enabled in both system view and port view. z The access port working in automatic mode does not support the voice VLAN function. Related command: display voice vlan status.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Extended VLAN Applications Chapter 1 Voice VLAN Configuration Commands Use the undo voice vlan mac-address command to disable a MAC address from being used to identify voice devices. A switch can use up to 16 MAC addresses to identify voice devices, including the five default OUI addresses (as listed in Table 1-2). When the number of MAC addresses reaches 16, you will fail to add new MAC addresses.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Extended VLAN Applications Chapter 1 Voice VLAN Configuration Commands Use the undo voice vlan mode auto command to configure an Ethernet port to operate in the manual voice VLAN mode. By default, an Ethernet port operates in the automatic voice VLAN mode. Related command: display voice vlan status. Example # Configure GigabitEthernet3/0/2 port to operate in the manual voice VLAN mode. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Extended VLAN Applications Chapter 1 Voice VLAN Configuration Commands [3Com] undo voice vlan security enable 1-9
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Extended VLAN Applications Chapter 2 isolate-user-VLAN Configuration Commands Chapter 2 isolate-user-VLAN Configuration Commands Note: You need to configure the hybrid attribute for a port in the process of configuring an isolate-user-VLAN. For hybrid port-related commands, refer to the Port Basic Configuration part of the 3Com Switch 7750 Command Reference Guide. 2.1 isolate-user-VLAN Configuration Commands 2.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Extended VLAN Applications Chapter 2 isolate-user-VLAN Configuration Commands Isolate-user-VLAN type : isolate-user-VLAN Route Interface: not configured Description: VLAN 0003 Tagged Ports: none Untagged Ports: Ethernet1/0/4 Ethernet1/0/8 Ethernet1/0/18 Vlan ID: 4 Vlan Type: static Private-vlan Type : Secondary Route Interface: not configured Description: VLAN 0004 Tagged Ports: none Untagged Ports: Ethernet1/0/4 Ethernet1/0/8 Vlan ID: 5 Vlan Type
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Extended VLAN Applications Chapter 2 isolate-user-VLAN Configuration Commands Description Use the isolate-user-vlan command to establish the mapping between the isolate-user-VLAN and the secondary VLAN. Use the undo isolate-user-vlan command to cancel the mapping between the isolate-user-VLAN and the secondary VLAN.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Extended VLAN Applications Chapter 2 isolate-user-VLAN Configuration Commands Note: z Multiple isolate-user-VLANs can be configured for a switch. z With GVRP function enabled, a switch cannot be enabled with isolate-user-VLAN function. z The isolate-user-VLAN function and super VLAN function cannot be enabled simultaneously for a VLAN.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Extended VLAN Applications Chapter 3 Super VLAN Configuration Commands Chapter 3 Super VLAN Configuration Commands 3.1 Super VLAN Configuration Commands 3.1.1 dhcp-server Syntax dhcp-server groupNo undo dhcp-server View VLAN interface view Parameter groupNo: Number of DHCP server, ranging from 0 to 19. Description Use the dhcp-server command to specify which DHCP server group a VLAN interface belongs to.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Extended VLAN Applications Chapter 3 Super VLAN Configuration Commands Description Use the display supervlan command to view the mapping relationship between Super VLAN and Sub VLAN, and the ports identifying mapping relationship between super VLAN and sub VLAN. Related command: supervlan, and subvlan. Example # Display the mapping relationship between Super VLAN 100 and the sub VLANs.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Extended VLAN Applications Chapter 3 Super VLAN Configuration Commands Broadcast MAX-ratio: 100 Tagged Ports: none Untagged Ports: Ethernet3/0/4 3.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Extended VLAN Applications Chapter 3 Super VLAN Configuration Commands Example # Establish the mapping relationship between sub VLAN 3, 4, 5, 9 and super VLAN 10. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] vlan 10 [3Com-vlan10] supervlan [3Com-vlan10] subvlan 3 to 5 9 3.1.4 supervlan Syntax supervlan undo supervlan View VLAN view Parameter None Description Use the supervlan commmand to set current VLAN to super VLAN.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Extended VLAN Applications Chapter 3 Super VLAN Configuration Commands 3-5
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands....................................................................... 1-1 1.1 IP Address Configuration Commands ............................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 display ip interface .................................................................................................. 1-1 1.1.2 ip address............................
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Table of Contents 3.1.15 ipx route-static ..................................................................................................... 3-16 3.1.16 ipx sap disable..................................................................................................... 3-17 3.1.17 ipx sap gns-disable-reply .................................................................................... 3-17 3.1.18 ipx sap gns-load-balance ..................
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands 1.1 IP Address Configuration Commands 1.1.1 display ip interface Syntax display ip interface [ brief ] [ interface-type [ interface-number ] View Any view Parameter interface-type interface-number: interface-type indicates a port type and interface-number indicates a port number.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands Source quench: 0 Routing redirect: 0 Echo request: 0 Router advert: 0 Router solicit: 0 Time exceed: 0 IP header bad: 0 Timestamp request: 0 Timestamp reply: 0 Information request: 0 Information reply: 0 Netmask request: 0 Netmask reply: 0 Unknown type: 0 Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the display ip interface command Field Description Vlan-interface1 current state
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands Field ICMP 0 packet input Description number: Echo reply: 0 Unreachable: 0 Source quench: 0 Routing redirect: Echo 0 request: 0 Router advert: Router solicit: 0 0 Time exceed: 0 IP header bad: 0 Timestamp request: Timestamp reply: 0 Total number of received ICMP packets, including: Echo reply packet, unreachable packet, source quench packet, routing redirect packet, Echo request pac
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 1 IP Address Configuration Commands sub: Secondary IP address of a VLAN or loopback interface. Description Use the ip address command to specify an IP address and mask for a VLAN or loopback interface. Use the undo ip address command to remove an IP address and mask of a VLAN or loopback interface. By default, a VLAN or loopback interface has no IP address. Generally, it is enough to configure one IP address for an interface.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 2 IP Performance Configuration Commands Chapter 2 IP Performance Configuration Commands 2.1 IP Performance Configuration Commands 2.1.1 display fib Syntax display fib fib-rule View Any view Parameter fib-rule: Specifies FIB entries that conform to specific rules. It can be a combination of multiple rules. The following table describes the combinations.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 2 IP Performance Configuration Commands Description Use the display fib command to view the summary of the forwarding information base (FIB). Each line indicates an FIB entry. The information includes: destination address/mask length, next hop, current flag, timestamp, and output interface. For the ACL configuration, refer to the ACL module of this manual. Example # View all the FIB summary.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 2 IP Performance Configuration Commands <3Com>display fib acl 2001 Route Entry matched by access-list 2001 Summary Counts :1 Destination/Mask Nexthop Flag TimeStamp 211.71.75.0/24 1.1.1.2 GSU t[250763] Interface Vlan-interface2 # View all the lines from the line containing the string 1.1.1.1. <3Com> display fib | begin 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.1/32 127.0.0.1 GHU t[37] 1.1.1.0/24 1.1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX timestamp Chapter 2 IP Performance Configuration Commands 0 information reply mask requests 0 0 mask replies 0 time exceeded 0 Table 2-3 Description on the fields of the display icmp statistics command Field Description bad formats Number of input packets in bad formats bad checksum Number of input packets with bad checksum echo Number of input/output echo request packets destination unreachable Number of input/output packets with u
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 2 IP Performance Configuration Commands Description Use the display ip socket command to display the information of the current socket. Example # Display the information about the socket of the TCP type. <3Com> display ip socket socktype 1 SOCK_STREAM: Task = VTYD(18), socketid = 1, Proto = 6, LA = 0.0.0.0:23, FA = 0.0.0.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 2 IP Performance Configuration Commands Field Description socket option Option of a socket socket state State of a socket 2.1.4 display ip statistics Syntax display ip statistics View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display ip statistics command to view the statistics about IP packets. Related command: display ip interface and reset ip statistics. Example # View the statistics about IP packets.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 2 IP Performance Configuration Commands Field Description number Output: Fragment: Reassembling: bad format Number of packets in bad format bad checksum Number of packets with bad checksum bad options Number of packets with wrong options forwarding Number of forwarded packets local Number of packets sent by the local device dropped Number of transmission no route Number of packets that cannot be routed compress fails Nu
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 2 IP Performance Configuration Commands Example # View the statistics about TCP packets.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 2 IP Performance Configuration Commands Field Sent packets Description checksum error/ offset error/ short error Number of checksum errors/number of offset errors/number of short errors duplicate partially packets Number of duplicate packets/number of partially duplicate packets packets/ duplicate out-of-order packets Number of out-of-order packets packets of data after window Number of packets out of window packets received af
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 2 IP Performance Configuration Commands Field Description Packets dropped with MD5 authentication Number of dropped packets with MD5 authentication Packets permitted with MD5 authentication Number of permitted packets with MD5 authentication 2.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 2 IP Performance Configuration Commands 2.1.7 display udp statistics Syntax display udp statistics View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display udp statistics command to view the statistics about UDP packets. Related command: reset udp statistics. Example # View the statistics about UDP packets.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 2 IP Performance Configuration Commands Field Description total broadcast multicast packets or Total number of transmitted broadcast or multicast packets no socket broadcast or Total number of transmitted broadcast or multicast packets multicast packets whose sockets are not found not delivered, socket full input packets pcb cache Sent packet: input Number of not delivered packets because the socket cache is full missing Total Numbe
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 2 IP Performance Configuration Commands 2.1.9 ip forward-broadcast Syntax ip forward-broadcast undo ip forward-broadcast View System view Parameter None Description Use the ip forward-broadcast command to forward layer 3 broadcast packets. Use the undo ip forward-broadcast command to forbid forwarding layer 3 broadcast packets.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 2 IP Performance Configuration Commands Example # Clear the statistics information about IP packets. <3Com> reset ip statistics 2.1.11 reset tcp statistics Syntax reset tcp statistics View User view Parameter None Description Use the reset tcp statistics command to clear the statistics information about TCP packets. Related command: display tcp statistics. Example # Clear the statistics information about TCP packets.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 2 IP Performance Configuration Commands <3Com> reset udp statistics 2.1.13 tcp timer fin-timeout Syntax tcp timer fin-timeout time-value undo tcp timer fin-timeout View System view Parameter time-value: TCP finwait timer value, in seconds, with the value ranging from 76 to 3600. Description Use the tcp timer fin-timeout command to configure the TCP finwait timer.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 2 IP Performance Configuration Commands Parameter time-value: TCP synwait timer value, in seconds, with the value ranging from 2 to 600. Description Use the tcp timer syn-timeout command to configure the TCP synwait timer. Use the undo tcp timer syn-timeout command to restore the default value of the TCP synwait timer. The default value is 75 seconds. When sending the SYN packet, TCP starts the synwait timer.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 2 IP Performance Configuration Commands Example # Configure the size of the transmission and receiving buffers to 3KB. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands 3.1 IPX Configuration Commands 3.1.1 display ipx interface Syntax display ipx interface [Vlan-interface vlan-id ] View Any view Parameter vlan-id: Specifies a VLAN interface by specifying its VLAN ID. Description Use the display ipx interface command to view the IPX information of the specified VLAN interface.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands 0 RIP general requests received, 0 RIP general responses sent 0 SAP received, 0 SAP sent, 0 SAP discarded 0 SAP requests received, 0 SAP responses sent Table 3-1 Description on the fields of the display ipx interface command Field Description Vlan-interface1 is down State of the current VLAN interface IPX address IPX network number and node address of the current VLAN interface [down] State of the IPX p
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands 3.1.2 display ipx routing-table Syntax display ipx routing-table [ network [ verbose ] | protocol { default | direct | rip | static } [ inactive | verbose ] | statistics | verbose ] View Any view Parameter network: Displays IPX routing information by specifying a destination network number, which comprises eight hexadecimal numbers and is in the range of 1 to 0xFFFFFFFE.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands Table 3-2 Description on the fields of the display ipx routing-table command Field Description Dest_Ntwk_ID Destination network number of the route Proto Protocol type of the route Pre Route preference Ticks Tick count of the route Hops Hop count of the route Nexthop Next hop of the route Interface Outgoing interface of the route # Display the detailed IPX routing information, including the acti
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands Field Description The state of the route. It can be active, inactive, or delete. Active indicates that this route is an active route. Inactive indicates that this route is an inactive route. Delete indicate that this route has been deleted, but it is not released. State # View the IPX routing statistics.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands network network: Displays the network number information of the specified server. The network number comprises eight hexadecimal numbers and is in the range of 0x1 to 0xFFFFFFFF. The leading 0s can be omitted when you input a network number. order { network | type }: Displays the service information by network number or by service type.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands Table 3-5 Description on the fields of the display ipx service-table command Field Description Name Server name Type Service type NetId Network number NodeId Node number Sock Socket Pref Preference Hops Hop count Recv-If Name of the interface receiving services 3.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands 0 requests sent, 0 periodic updates SAP: 0 general requests received 0 specific requests received 0 GNS requests received 0 general responses sent 0 specific responses sent 0 GNS responses sent 0 periodic updates, 0 errors PING: 0 requests sent, 0 requests received 0 responses sent, 0 responses received 0 responses in time, 0 responses time out Table 3-6 Description on the fields of the display ipx statisti
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands Field SAP: Description 0 general requests received Statistics of SAP packets: the number of received general request packets, the number of special request packets, the number of latest request packets, the number of transmitted periodic update packets, and the number of received error packets 0 specific requests received 0 GNS requests received 0 general responses sent 0 specific responses sent 0 GNS respo
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands 3.1.6 ipx encapsulation Syntax ipx encapsulation [ dot2 | dot3 | ethernet-2 | snap ] undo ipx encapsulation View VLAN interface view Parameter dot2: Sets the encapsulation format to Ethernet_802.2. dot3: Sets the encapsulation format to Ethernet_802.3. ethernet-2: Sets the encapsulation format to Ethernet_II. snap: Sets the encapsulation format to Ethernet_SNAP.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands Description Use the ipx netbios-propagation command to enable the current VLAN interface to forward type 20 broadcast packets. Use the undo ipx netbios-propagation command to disable the current VLAN interface from forwarding type 20 broadcast packets. By default, type 20 broadcast packets are not forwarded. Example # Allow the current interface to forward type 20 broadcast packets.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands [3Com-Vlan-interface2]ipx network 675 3.1.9 ipx rip import-route static Syntax ipx rip import-route static undo ipx rip import-route static View System view Parameter None Description Use the ipx rip import-route static command to enable RIP to import static routes. The imported routes are included in the update packets of RIP.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands Description Use the ipx rip mtu command to configure the IPX RIP update packet size. Use the undo ipx rip mtu command to restore the default size. By default, the default size of IPX RIP update packets is 432 bytes. Example # Set the maximum RIP update packet size to 500 bytes on VLAN interface 2. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands [3Com] ipx rip multiplier 5 3.1.12 ipx rip timer update Syntax ipx rip timer update seconds undo ipx rip timer update View System view Parameter seconds: RIP update interval, in seconds. It is in the range of 10 to 60,000. Description Use the ipx rip timer update command to configure a RIP update interval. Use the undo ipx rip timer update command to restore the default value.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands Description Use the ipx route load-balance-path command to configure the maximum number of equivalent routes to the same destination. Use the undo ipx route load-balance-path command to restore the default value. By default, the maximum number of equivalent routes to the same destination is 1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands Example # Set the maximum number of dynamic routes saved in the device to the same destination to 200. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] ipx route max-reserve-path 200 3.1.15 ipx route-static Syntax ipx route-static network network.node [ preference value ] [ tick ticks hop hops ] undo ipx route-static { network [ network.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands Example # Configure an IPX static route, with the destination network number being 0x5a, next hop being 675.0-0c91-f61f, tick value being 10 and hop count being 2. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] ipx route-static 5a 675.0-0c91-f61f tick 10 hop 2 3.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands Parameter None Description Use the ipx sap gns-disable-reply command to disable IPX GNS reply on the current VLAN interface. Use the undo ipx sap gns-disable-reply command to enable IPX GNS reply on the current VLAN interface. By default, GNS reply is enabled on the current VLAN interface. Example # Disable GNS reply on VLAN interface 2. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands Example # Respond to GNS requests with the information of the nearest server. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] undo ipx sap gns-load-balance 3.1.19 ipx sap max-reserve-servers Syntax ipx sap max-reserve-servers length undo ipx sap max-reserve-servers View System view Parameter length: The maximum length of the service information reserve queue for one service type.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands View VLAN interface view Parameter bytes: The maximum SAP packet size, in bytes. It is in the range of 480 to 1500. Description Use the ipx sap mtu command to configure the maximum size of SAP update packets. Use the undo ipx sap mtu command to restore the default value. By default, the default size of SAP update packets is 480 bytes.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands Example # Set the aging period of the SAP service entries to five times the update interval. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] ipx sap multiplier 5 3.1.22 ipx sap timer update Syntax ipx sap timer update seconds undo ipx sap timer update View System view Parameter seconds: SAP update interval. It is in the range of 10 to 60,000.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands View System view Parameter service-type: A 4-byte hexadecimal number ranging from 0 to FFFF. 0 indicates all the service types. name: Specifies the server providing the specified service, a string of 1 to 47 characters. network.node: Network number and node value of the server. The network number comprises eight hexadecimal numbers and is in the range of 0x1 to 0xFFFFFFFD.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands 3.1.24 ipx split-horizon Syntax ipx split-horizon undo ipx split-horizon View VLAN interface view Parameter None Description Use the ipx split-horizon command to enable split horizon on the current VLAN interface. Use the undo ipx split-horizon command to disable split horizon on the current VLAN interface. By default, split horizon is enabled. Example # Enable split horizon on VLAN interface 2.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands Use the undo ipx tick command to restore the default value. By default, the forwarding delay on the VLAN interface is one tick. Example # Configure VLAN interface 2 to experience a delay of five ticks before forwarding IPX packets. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com]interface Vlan-interface 2 [3Com-Vlan-interface2] ipx tick 5 3.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — IP / IPX Chapter 3 IPX Configuration Commands View User view Parameter all: Clears the statistics of all the IPX routes. default: Clears the statistics of the default IPX routes. direct: Clears the statistics of the direct IPX routes. rip: Clears the statistics of the IPX RIP routes. static: Clears the statistics of the static IPX routes.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — GVRP Commands Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 GVRP Configuration Commands ............................................................................... 1-1 1.1 GARP Configuration Commands....................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 display garp statistics .............................................................................................. 1-1 1.1.2 display garp timer ...........
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — GVRP Commands Chapter 1 GVRP Configuration Commands Chapter 1 GVRP Configuration Commands 1.1 GARP Configuration Commands 1.1.1 display garp statistics Syntax display garp statistics [ interface interface-list ] View Any view Parameter interface-list: List of Ethernet ports.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — GVRP Commands Chapter 1 GVRP Configuration Commands 1.1.2 display garp timer Syntax display garp timer [ interface interface-list ] View Any view Parameter interface-list: List of Ethernet ports.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — GVRP Commands Chapter 1 GVRP Configuration Commands View Ethernet port view Parameter hold: Sets the GARP Hold timer. When a GARP entity receives a piece of registration information, it does not send out a Join message immediately. Instead, to save the bandwidth resources, it starts the Hold timer, puts all registration information it receives before the timer times out into one Join message and sends out the message after the timer times out.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — GVRP Commands Timer Chapter 1 GVRP Configuration Commands Lower threshold Upper threshold Join This lower threshold is greater than or equal to twice the timeout time of the Hold timer. You can change the threshold by changing the timeout time of the Hold timer. This upper threshold is less than one-half of the timeout time of the Leave timer. You can change the threshold by changing the timeout time of the Leave timer.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — GVRP Commands Chapter 1 GVRP Configuration Commands Also note that this argument needs to be a multiple of 5 and cannot be larger than 32,765. By default, the LeaveAll timer is set to 1,000 centiseconds (that is, 10 seconds). Description Use the garp timer leaveall command to set the GARP LeaveAll timer. Use the undo garp timer leaveall command to restore the default setting of the GARP LeaveAll timer.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — GVRP Commands Chapter 1 GVRP Configuration Commands Related command: display garp statistics. Example # Clear GARP statistics of all ports. <3Com> reset garp statistics 1.2 GVRP Configuration Commands 1.2.1 display gvrp statistics Syntax display gvrp statistics [ interface interface-list ] View Any view Parameter interface-list: List of Ethernet ports.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — GVRP Commands Chapter 1 GVRP Configuration Commands GVRP Last Pdu Origin : 0000-0000-0000 GVRP Registration Type : Normal 1.2.2 display gvrp status Syntax display gvrp status View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display gvrp status command to display the global GVRP status (enabled or disabled). Example # Display the global GVRP status.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — GVRP Commands Chapter 1 GVRP Configuration Commands By default, GVRP is disabled both globally and on ports. Note that: z To enable GVRP for a port, you need to enable GVRP globally first. z GVRP is disabled on any ports if GVRP is disabled globally. In this case, you cannot enable GVRP for a port. z You can enable/disable GVRP only on trunk ports. z After you enable GVRP on a trunk port, you cannot change the port to other types.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — GVRP Commands Chapter 1 GVRP Configuration Commands Related command: display gvrp statistics Example # Configure the GVRP registration type on the port Ethernet1/0/1 to fixed. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Q-in-Q Commands Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 Q-in-Q Configuration Commands .............................................................................. 1-1 1.1 Q-in-Q Configuration Commands ...................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 display port vlan-vpn ............................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.2 vlan-vpn enable ..........
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Q-in-Q Commands Chapter 1 Q-in-Q Configuration Commands Chapter 1 Q-in-Q Configuration Commands 1.1 Q-in-Q Configuration Commands 1.1.1 display port vlan-vpn Syntax display port vlan-vpn View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display port vlan-vpn command to display the Q-in-Q configuration of the current system, including the current status of VLAN-VPN and the VLAN ID of VLAN-VPN.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Q-in-Q Commands Chapter 1 Q-in-Q Configuration Commands Description Use the vlan-vpn enable command to enable the Q-in-Q function for a port. Use the undo vlan-vpn command to disable the Q-in-Q function for a port. By default, the Q-in-Q function is disabled. With the Q-in-Q function enabled, a received packet is tagged with the default VLAN tag of the receiving port no matter whether or not the packet already carries a VLAN tag.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Q-in-Q Commands Chapter 1 Q-in-Q Configuration Commands Use the undo vlan-vpn priority command to restore the default configuration. By default, inner-outer tag priority mapping is disabled. Example # Configure priority mappings between inner and outer VLAN tags on Ethernet 1/0/1 so that packets with the inner tag priority of 3 is tagged with an outer tag with the priority of 5. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Q-in-Q Commands Chapter 2 Selective Q-in-Q Configuration Commands Chapter 2 Selective Q-in-Q Configuration Commands Note: You can implement traffic-based selective Q-in-Q on an Switch 7750 Series switch by using ACLs and QoS techniques. Refer to the QoS part of this manual for related commands and operations. 2.1 Selective Q-in-Q Configuration Commands 2.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Q-in-Q Commands Chapter 2 Selective Q-in-Q Configuration Commands Example # Configure that the single-tagged inbound packets of VLAN 8 through VLAN 15 are tagged with VLAN 20 tags on Ethernet1/0/1 port. Configure Ethernet 1/0/5 as the uplink port and configure it to remove the outer VLAN tag. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Q-in-Q Commands Chapter 2 Selective Q-in-Q Configuration Commands untagged attribute. When the uplink port is not available, if you modify this configuration, the configuration of the raw-vlan-id inbound command is removed at the same time. Caution: Do not add a Q-in-Q-enabled port and its corresponding uplink port into the same link aggregation group. Note that the vlan-vpn vid command needs to be coupled by the raw-vlan-id inbound command.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Q-in-Q Commands Chapter 3 Shared-VLAN Configuration Commands Chapter 3 Shared-VLAN Configuration Commands 3.1 Shared-VLAN Configuration Commands 3.1.1 display shared-vlan Syntax display shared-vlan View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display shared-vlan command to display shared-VLAN configured on all the boards in the system. Example # Display shared-VLAN configured on all the boards in the current system.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Q-in-Q Commands Chapter 3 Shared-VLAN Configuration Commands Description Use the shared-vlan mainboard command to configure shared-VLAN on an SRPU. Use the undo shared-vlan mainboard command to remove the configuration. By default, no shared-VLAN is configured on the SRPU. Note: z If an active SRPU is equipped with the device, shared-VLAN takes effect on active/standby SRPUs at the same time.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Q-in-Q Commands Chapter 3 Shared-VLAN Configuration Commands Use the undo shared-vlan slot command to remove the configuration. By default, no shared-VLAN is configured on the LPU. Note: You must use a created VLAN as shared-VLAN; otherwise the system gives an error prompt. Caution: Shared-VLAN can damage and disable RRPP. Therefore, do not enable both RRPP and shared-VLAN on the switch. Example # Configure VLAN 20 on the LPU in slot 3 as shared-VLAN.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands........................................................................ 1-1 1.1 Port Basic Configuration Commands................................................................................. 1-1 1.1.1 broadcast-suppression............................................................................................ 1-1 1.1.2 copy configuration ............
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands 1.1 Port Basic Configuration Commands 1.1.1 broadcast-suppression Syntax broadcast-suppression { ratio | bandwidth bandwidth | pps pps } undo broadcast-suppression View Ethernet port view Parameter ratio: Maximum ratio of the received broadcast traffic to the total bandwidth on an Ethernet port. The value ranges from 1 to 100 and defaults to 100.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands Note: z Broadcast suppression is set in different ways for different LPUs of the switch 7750 series: For type-A LPUs, broadcast suppression must be set in VLAN view; for non-type-A LPUs, broadcast suppression must be set in Ethernet port view. z Type-A LPUs include 3C16860, 3C16861, 3C16858, and 3C16859. A port supports one way of broadcast suppression at the same time.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands Description Use the copy configuration command to copy the configuration on a port to some other ports to keep consistent configuration on them. Note: Any aggregation group port you input in the destination port list will be removed from the list and the copy command will not take effect on the port.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands Parameter text: Port description, a string of up to 80 characters. Description Use the description command to set a port description string. Use the undo description command to remove the port description string. By default, no description is defined for a port. Example # Set description string "lanswitch-interface" for the Ethernet1/0/1 port.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands This command is similar to the display interface command, but the information it displays is briefer. Note: Currently, for the port types other than Ethernet port, this command only displays the link state, and shows "--" in all other configuration information fields. Related command: display interface.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands View Any view Parameter interface-type: Port type. interface-number: Port number. Description Use the display interface command to display port configuration. When using this command: If you specify neither port type nor port number, the command displays information z about all ports. If you specify only port type, the command displays information about all ports of z the specified type.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Input(normal): Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands - packets, - bytes - broadcasts, - multicasts, - pauses Input: - input errors, 0 runts, - giants, 0 frame, 0 throttles, 0 CRC - overruns, - aborts, - ignored, - parity errors Output(total): 1288 packets, 116919 bytes 0 broadcasts, 886 multicasts, 0 pauses Output(normal): - packets, - bytes - broadcasts, - multicasts, - pauses Output: 0 output errors, - underruns, - buffer
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Field Input(total): bytes Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands Description 1150 packets, 149854 542 broadcasts, 55 multicasts, pauses Input(normal): - packets, - bytes - broadcasts, - multicasts, - pauses Input: - input errors, 0 runts, - giants, 0 throttles, 0 CRC Statistics on the incoming packets and errors on the port The “-” indicates that the statistical item is not supported.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands Description Use the display loopback-detection command to display the information related to the loopback detection function on the port. Example # Display the information about loopback detection on the port and “e” is not included in the interface name.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands Description Use the display port command to display whether there are hybrid ports or trunk ports in the current system. If there is such port, the port name and the ID of the VLAN permitted on the port are displayed. Example # Display the trunk ports in the current system. <3Com> display port trunk Interface VLAN passing Ethernet3/0/3 1 Ethernet3/0/11 1-2, 4-5, 10 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands Table 1-4 describes the fields of the display transceiver-information interface command.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 [3Com-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] duplex full 1.1.10 flow-control Syntax flow-control undo flow-control View Ethernet port view Parameter None Description Use the flow-control command to enable flow control on the port so as to avoid packet loss during congestion.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands undo flow-control disable View System view Parameter None Description Use the flow-control enable command to enable flow control globally. Use the flow-control disable command to disable flow control globally. By default, flow control is disabled globally. Example # Enable flow control globally. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] flow-control enable 1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands rates in the interval. For example, if you set the interval to 100 seconds, the displayed information is as follows: Last 100 seconds input: Last 100 seconds output: 0 packets/sec 0 bytes/sec 0 packets/sec 0 bytes/sec Related command: display interface. Example # Set the interval to perform statistics on the Ethernet1/0/1 port to 100 seconds.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] hardspeedup enable 1.1.14 interface Syntax interface interface-type interface-number View System view Parameter interface-type: Port type, which can be Aux, Ethernet, GigabitEthernet, LoopBack, M-Ethernet, NULL, Tunnel or Vlan-interface.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands 1.1.15 jumboframe enable Syntax jumboframe enable [ jumboframe-value ] undo jumboframe enable View Ethernet port view Parameter jumboframe-value: Size of the permitted jumbo frame, in the range of 1,536 to 9,216 in byte. Description Use the jumboframe enable command to allow jumbo frames to pass through the current Ethernet port.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands Description Use the loopback-detection enable command to enable the loopback detection feature on the port. Use the undo loopback-detection enable command to disable the loopback detection feature on the port. By default, the loopback detection feature is disabled on the port. Related command: display loopback-detection. Example # Enable the loopback detection feature.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands 1.1.18 loopback-detection control Syntax loopback-detection control { block | nolearning | shutdown } undo loopback-detection control View Ethernet port view Parameter block: Specifies to block the port where loop is detected, that is, the port cannot receive or send any packets except BPDU packets. The system will periodically detect whether loopback still occurs on the port.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands 1.1.19 loopback-detection per-vlan enable Syntax loopback-detection per-vlan enable undo loopback-detection per-vlan enable View Ethernet port view Parameter None Description Use the loopback-detection per-vlan enable command to enable loopback detection for all the VLANs on the current trunk port or hybrid port.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands auto: Identifies the network cable type (crossover or straight through) automatically. normal: Specifies the network cable to be straight through network cable. Description Use the mdi command to set the network types that can be identified by Ethernet ports. Use the undo mdi command to restore the default network cable type that can be identified by Ethernet ports.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands z 1 to 100 for 100 Mbps Ethernet ports; z 1 to 1,000 Mbps for Gigabit Ethernet ports; z 1 to 10,000 Mbps for 10 GE ports. kbps kbps-value: Specifies the maximum bandwidth (in Kbps) for receiving multicast traffic, in the range of 64 to 1,024,000 in the step of 64. max-pps: Maximum number of multicast packets allowed to be received per second on the Ethernet port (in pps).
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands 1.1.22 port access vlan Syntax port access vlan vlan-id undo port access vlan View Ethernet port view Parameter vlan-id: VLAN ID defined in IEEE802.1Q, in the range of 2 to 4,094. Description Use the port access vlan command to add the access port into the specified VLAN. Use the undo port access vlan command to remove the access port from the specified VLAN.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands Use the undo port hybrid pvid command to restore the default VLAN ID of the hybrid port. Set the default VLAN ID of the local hybrid port to the same value as that of the hybrid port on the peer switch. Otherwise, packets cannot be forwarded properly. Related command: port link-type. Example # Set the default VLAN ID of the hybrid port Ethernet1/0/1 to 100.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands Example # Add the hybrid port Ethernet1/0/1 to VLAN 2, VLAN 4 and VLAN 50 through VLAN 100, with tags assigned to their packets. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] interface Ethernet1/0/1 [3Com-Ethernet1/0/1] port hybrid vlan 2 4 50 to 100 tagged 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands 1.1.26 port monitor last Syntax port monitor last [ value ] undo port monitor last View Ethernet port view Parameter value: Delay of reporting down state to the system, in the range of 0 to 60. When this argument is set to 0, the port will report its state as soon as it is brought down. The bigger this argument is, the longer delay it takes for a port to report its down state to the system.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands 1.1.27 port monitor last slot Syntax port monitor last [ slot slot-number ] value undo port monitor last [ slot slot-number ] View System view Parameter slot-number: Number of the slot where the board resides. value: Delay of reporting down state to the system, in the range of 0 to 60. When this argument is set to 0, the port will report its state as soon as it is brought down.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands Parameter vlan-id-list: VLAN range to which the trunk port will be added. vlan-id-list = [ vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] ]&<1-10>, where, vlan-id is in the range of 1 to 4094 and can be discrete, and &<1-10> means you can input up to ten VLAN IDs/ID ranges. all: Adds the trunk port into all VLANs. Description Use the port trunk permit vlan command to add the trunk port into the specified VLAN.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands Description Use the port trunk pvid vlan command to set the default VLAN ID for the trunk port. Use the undo port trunk pvid command to restore the default setting. To guarantee the proper packet transmission, the default VLAN ID of the local trunk port must be identical with that of the trunk port on the peer switch connected with the local trunk port. Related command: port link-type.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands 1.1.31 shutdown Syntax shutdown undo shutdown View Ethernet port view Parameter None Description Use the shutdown command to disable an Ethernet port. Use the undo shutdown command to enable an Ethernet port. By default, an Ethernet port is enabled. Example # Enable Ethernet1/0/1. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands Note: For ports of different types, the parameter prompts after you enter the speed command are also different. Description Use the speed command to set the port speed. Use the undo speed command to restore the port speed to the default setting. By default, the port speed is in the auto-negotiation mode. Example # Set the speed of Ethernet1/0/1 to 10 Mbps.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands Note: z The commands above are applicable to type-A LPUs only, including 3C16860, 3C16861, 3C16858, and 3C16859. z The commands above are diagnostic, so you cannot use them at discretion. Example # Enable the hardware speedup function outside the port. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] speedup enable 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands Description Use the unicast-suppression command to set the size of unknown unicast traffic allowed to be received on the current port. Use the undo unicast-suppression command to restore the size of unknown unicast traffic allowed to be received on the current port.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands Description Use the virtual-cable-test command to enable the system to test the cable connected to a specific port and to display the results. The system can test these attributes of the cable: z Cable status, including normal, abnormal, abnormal-open, abnormal-short and failure z Cable length Note: z If the cable is in normal state, the displayed information is “-”.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Basic Port Commands Pair polarity: normal Insertion loss: 7 db Return loss: 7 db Near-end crosstalk: 7 db 1-34 Chapter 1 Port Basic Configuration Commands
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Link Aggregation Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 Link Aggregation Configuration Commands............................................................ 1-1 1.1 Link Aggregation Configuration Commands...................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 display lacp system-id ............................................................................................. 1-1 1.1.2 display link-aggregation interface........
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Link Aggregation Chapter 1 Link Aggregation Configuration Commands Chapter 1 Link Aggregation Configuration Commands 1.1 Link Aggregation Configuration Commands 1.1.1 display lacp system-id Syntax display lacp system-id View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display lacp system-id command to display the device ID of the local system, including the system priority and the MAC address. Example # Display the device ID of the local system.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Link Aggregation Chapter 1 Link Aggregation Configuration Commands View Any view Parameter interface interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ]: Specifies a port range. z If the to keyword is not specified, only one port is specified; z If the to keyword is specified, multiple contiguous ports are specified; z The interface-type argument represents the port type and the interface-num argument represents the port number.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Link Aggregation Chapter 1 Link Aggregation Configuration Commands Table 1-2 Description on the fields of the display link-aggregation interface command Field Description ID of the aggregation group to which the specified port belongs Attached AggID Local: Port-Priority: 32768, Oper key: 1, Flag: 0x00 Remote: System ID: 0x0, 0000-0000-0000 Port Number: 0, Port-Priority: 0, Oper-key: 0, Flag: 0x00 Received LACP Packets: 0 packet(s), Illegal: 0 packet(s) S
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Link Aggregation AL AL ID Type Chapter 1 Link Aggregation Configuration Commands Partner ID Select Standby Share Master Ports Ports Port Type ------------------------------------------------------------------1 D 0x8000,00e0-fcff-ff01 1 0 NonS Ethernet4/0/1 10 M none 0 NonS Ethernet4/0/2 20 S 0x8000,00e0-fcff-ff01 1 0 NonS Ethernet4/0/3 1 Table 1-3 Description on the fields of the display link-aggregation summary command Field D
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Link Aggregation z Chapter 1 Link Aggregation Configuration Commands Local end details: device ID, port number, port status, port priority, LACP flag, operation key and connection status; z Remote end details: local port, remote port index, remote port priority, operation key, and device ID.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Link Aggregation Chapter 1 Link Aggregation Configuration Commands Field Description Port state Port state Local Other information about the local end, including port number, port state, port priority, LACP flag, operation key and connection status Remote Detailed information about the remote end, including: local port number, remote port index, port priority, flag bit, operation key and device ID 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Link Aggregation Chapter 1 Link Aggregation Configuration Commands Use the undo hash command to cancel the configuration. By default, the parameter used by the HASH algorithm in link aggregation is ip. Example # For LPU 2, use the destination IP address as the parameter of the HASH algorithm. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] hash dstip ioboard solt 2 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Link Aggregation Chapter 1 Link Aggregation Configuration Commands Parameter port-priority-value: Port priority, ranging from 0 to 65,535 and defaulting to 32,768. Description Use the lacp port-priority command to set the priority of the current port. Use the undo lacp port-priority command to restore the default port priority. Example # Set the port priority to 64. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Link Aggregation Chapter 1 Link Aggregation Configuration Commands 1.1.9 link-aggregation Syntax link-aggregation interface-type interface-number to interface-type interface-number [ both ] View System view Parameter interface-type: Port type. interface-num: Port number. to: Specifies a series of contiguous ports. both: Performs load sharing for both inbound traffic and outbound traffic on all member ports in the aggregation group.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Link Aggregation Chapter 1 Link Aggregation Configuration Commands View System view Parameter agg-id: Aggregation group ID, in the range of 1 to 384. agg-name: Aggregation group name, a string of 1 to 32 characters. Description Use the link-aggregation group description command to set a description for an aggregation group. Use the undo link-aggregation group description command to remove the description of the aggregation group.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Link Aggregation Chapter 1 Link Aggregation Configuration Commands <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] link-aggregation group 22 mode manual 1.1.12 port link-aggregation group Syntax port link-aggregation group agg-id undo port link-aggregation group View Ethernet port view Parameter agg-id: Aggregation group ID, in the range of 1 to 384.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide — Link Aggregation Chapter 1 Link Aggregation Configuration Commands z If the to keyword is not specified, only one port is specified; z If the to keyword is specified, multiple contiguous ports are specified; z The interface-type argument represents the port type and the interface-num argument represents the port number.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Port Isolation Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 Port Isolation Configuration Commands .................................................................. 1-1 1.1 Port Isolation Configuration Commands............................................................................ 1-1 1.1.1 description ............................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.2 display isolate port .......
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Port Isolation Chapter 1 Port Isolation Configuration Commands Chapter 1 Port Isolation Configuration Commands 1.1 Port Isolation Configuration Commands 1.1.1 description Syntax description text undo description View Isolation group view Parameter text: Description string for an isolation group, in the range of 1 character to 80 characters. Description Use the description command to specify the description string for the current isolation group.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Port Isolation Chapter 1 Port Isolation Configuration Commands Parameter group-id: ID of an isolation group, in the range of 1 to 64. Description Use the display isolate port command to display the configuration of the created isolation group, including: z ID of the isolation group z Description string for the isolation group z Ports that the isolation group contains Example # Display the configuration of isolation group 1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Port Isolation Chapter 1 Port Isolation Configuration Commands This command functions the same as the 1.1.4 port isolate command except that Ethernet ports must be specified in this command. Example # Add GigabitEthernet1/0/1 to isolation group 1. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] port-isolate group 1 [3Com-port-isolate-group1] port GigabitEthernet1/0/1 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Port Isolation Chapter 1 Port Isolation Configuration Commands <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] interface gigabitethernet1/0/1 [3Com-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port isolate group 1 1.1.5 port-isolate group Syntax port-isolate group group-id undo port-isolate group group-id View System view Parameter group-id: ID of an isolation group, in the range of 1 to 64.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Port Security & Port Binding Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 Port Security Commands............................................................................................ 1-1 1.1 Port Security Commands................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 display port-security ................................................................................................ 1-1 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Port Security & Port Binding Chapter 1 Port Security Commands Chapter 1 Port Security Commands 1.1 Port Security Commands 1.1.1 display port-security Syntax display port-security [ interface interface-list ] View Any view Parameter interface-list: Ethernet port list, which can contain multiple Ethernet ports.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Port Security & Port Binding Chapter 1 Port Security Commands AddressLearn trap is Enabled Intrusion trap is Enabled Dot1x logon trap is Enabled Dot1x logoff trap is Enabled Dot1x logfailure trap is Enabled RALM logon trap is Enabled RALM logoff trap is Enabled RALM logfailure trap is Enabled Vlan id assigned is NULL Disableport Timeout: 20 s OUI value: Index is 5, OUI value is 00efec GigabitEthernet1/0/1 is link-down Port mode is Userlogin NeedtoKnow mo
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Port Security & Port Binding Field Chapter 1 Port Security Commands Description Vlan id assigned is NULL The delivered VLAN ID is null. Disableport Timeout: 20 s The temporary port-disabling time is 20 seconds. OUI value The next line displays OUI value. GigabitEthernet1/0/1 is link-down The link status of the GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 is "down". Port mode is Userlogin The security mode of the port is Userlogin.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Port Security & Port Binding Chapter 1 Port Security Commands Caution: To avoid confliction, the following restrictions on 802.1x authentication and MAC address authentication occur after port security is enabled: z The access control mode (set by the dot1x port-control command) automatically z The dot1x, dot1x port-method, dot1x port-control and mac-authentication changes to auto. commands cannot be used. Example # Enter system view.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Port Security & Port Binding Chapter 1 Port Security Commands Note: If intrusion protection mode is set to disableport-temporarily on the port, the time set by the port-security timer disableport command determines how long the system temporarily disables the port when intrusion protection is triggered on the port.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Port Security & Port Binding Chapter 1 Port Security Commands [3Com] interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 # Configure the switch to disable GigabitEthernet1/0/1 when intrusion protection is triggered on the port. [3Com-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port-security intrusion-mode disableport 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Port Security & Port Binding Chapter 1 Port Security Commands 1.1.5 port-security max-mac-count Syntax port-security max-mac-count count-value undo port-security max-mac-count View Ethernet port view Parameter count-value: Maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on the port, in the range of 1 to 16,384. Description Use the port-security max-mac-count command to set the maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on the port.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Port Security & Port Binding Chapter 1 Port Security Commands View Ethernet port view Parameter ntkonly: Allows the port to transmit only unicast packets with successfully-authenticated destination MAC addresses. ntk-withbroadcasts: Allows the port to transmit broadcast packets and unicast packets with successfully-authenticated destination MAC addresses.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Port Security & Port Binding Chapter 1 Port Security Commands 1.1.7 port-security oui Syntax port-security oui OUI-value index index-value undo port-security oui index id-value View System view Parameter OUI-value: OUI value. You can input a full MAC address (in hexadecimal format) for this argument and the system will calculate the OUI value from your input. index-value: OUI index, ranging from 1 to 16.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Port Security & Port Binding Chapter 1 Port Security Commands Example # Set an OUI value by specifying the MAC address 00ef-ec00-0000, with an OUI index of 5. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] port-security oui 00ef-ec00-0000 index 5 1.1.8 port-security port-mode Syntax port-security port-mode mode undo port-security port-mode View Ethernet port view Parameter mode: Security mode of the port.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Port Security & Port Binding Chapter 1 Port Security Commands Table 1-2 Description of port security modes Security mode Description In this mode, the port is disabled from learning MAC addresses. secure userlogin Only those packets whose source MAC addresses are static MAC addresses configured can pass through the port. In this mode, port-based 802.1x authentication is performed for access users.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Port Security & Port Binding Security mode Chapter 1 Port Security Commands Description Feature The port is enabled only after an access user passes the 802.1x authentication. When the port is enabled, only the packets of the successfully authenticated user can pass through the port. userloginsecure userloginwithoui In this mode, only one 802.1x-authenticated user is allowed to access the port.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Port Security & Port Binding Chapter 1 Port Security Commands Note: When a port works in the userlogin-secure-else-mac-ext mode or the userlogin-secure-else-mac mode, for the same packet, intrusion protection can be triggered only after both MAC authentication and 802.1x authentication fail. By default, no security mode is set on the port. Example # Enter system view. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Port Security & Port Binding Chapter 1 Port Security Commands Note: After the port-security intrusion-mode disableport-temporarily command is executed on a port, the time set by the port-security timer disableport timer command determines how long the port can be temporarily disabled. Example # Set the time during which the system temporarily disables a port to 50 seconds. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Port Security & Port Binding Chapter 1 Port Security Commands Note: RADIUS authenticated login using MAC-address (RALM) refers to MAC address–based RADIUS authentication. Description Use the port-security trap command to enable the sending of specified type(s) of trap messages. Use the undo port-security trap command to disable the sending of specified type(s) of trap messages.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Port Security & Port Binding Chapter 2 Port Binding Commands Chapter 2 Port Binding Commands 2.1 Port Binding Commands 2.1.1 am user-bind interface Syntax am user-bind mac-addr mac-address ip-addr ip-address interface interface-type interface-number undo am user-bind mac-addr mac-address ip-addr ip-address interface interface-type interface-number View System view Parameter mac-address: MAC address to be bound. ip-address: IP address to be bound.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Port Security & Port Binding Chapter 2 Port Binding Commands <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] am user-bind mac-addr 00e0-fc00-5101 ip-addr 10.153.1.1 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 2.1.2 am user-bind Syntax am user-bind mac-addr mac-address ip-addr ip-address undo am user-bind mac-addr mac-address ip-addr ip-address View Ethernet port view Parameter mac-address: MAC address to be bound.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Port Security & Port Binding Chapter 2 Port Binding Commands 2.1.3 display am user-bind Syntax display am user-bind [ interface interface-type interface-number | mac-addr mac-addr | ip-addr ip-addr ] View Any view Parameter interface: Displays binding information on a specified port. interface-type: Port type. interface-number: Port number. mac-addr mac-addr: Displays only the binding information of a specified MAC address.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DLDP Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 DLDP Configuration Commands................................................................................ 1-1 1.1 DLDP Configuration Commands ....................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 display dldp ............................................................................................................. 1-1 1.1.2 dldp..............................
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DLDP Chapter 1 DLDP Configuration Commands Chapter 1 DLDP Configuration Commands 1.1 DLDP Configuration Commands 1.1.1 display dldp Syntax display dldp [ interface-type interface-number ] View Any view Parameter interface-type: Port type. interface-number: Port number. Description Use the display dldp command to display the configuration information, status information and neighbor tables of the DLDP-enabled port.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DLDP Chapter 1 DLDP Configuration Commands dldp link state : down The neighbor number of the port is 0. interface GigabitEthernet2/0/2 dldp port state : advertisement dldp link state : up The neighbor number of the port is 1. neighbor mac address : 00e0-fc27-750d neighbor port index : 98 neighbor state : two way neighbor aged time : 24 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DLDP Chapter 1 DLDP Configuration Commands Note: When you use the dldp enable/dldp disable commands in system view to enable/disable DLDP globally on all optical ports of the switch, these commands are only valid for the existing optical ports on the device, however, they are not valid for those added subsequently. Example # Enable DLDP globally on all optical ports of the switch. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DLDP Chapter 1 DLDP Configuration Commands When you configure the DLDP authentication mode and authentication password, make sure the same DLDP authentication mode and password are set for the ports connecting the local and peer devices. Otherwise, DLDP authentication fails. DLDP cannot work when DLDP authentication fails. Related command: dldp unidirectional-shutdown. Example # Enable DLDP on the ports connecting two devices.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DLDP Chapter 1 DLDP Configuration Commands unidirectional links. On the contrary, if too short an interval is set, network traffic increases, and port bandwidth is reduced. Generally, the STP convergence time is 30 seconds. Example # Set the interval of sending advertisement packets to 20 seconds for all the DLDP-enabled ports. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] dldp interval 20 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DLDP Chapter 1 DLDP Configuration Commands 1.1.6 dldp unidirectional-shutdown Syntax dldp unidirectional-shutdown { auto | manual } undo dldp unidirectional-shutdown View System view Parameter auto: Disables the corresponding port automatically when DLDP detects a unidirectional link. manual: Prompts the user to disable the corresponding port manually instead of disabling the port automatically when DLDP detects an unidirectional link.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DLDP Chapter 1 DLDP Configuration Commands Parameter enhance: Configures DLDP to work in enhanced mode. In this mode, DLDP probes actively whether neighbors exist when neighbor tables are aging. normal: Configures DLDP to work in normal mode. In this mode, DLDP does not probe actively whether neighbors exist when neighbor tables are aging. Description Use the dldp work-mode command to set the DLDP operating mode.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MAC Address Table Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 MAC Address Table Configuration Commands ....................................................... 1-1 1.1 MAC Address Table Configuration Commands................................................................. 1-1 1.1.1 bridgemactocpu....................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.2 display mac-address aging-time ................
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MAC Address Table Chapter 1 MAC Address Table Configuration Commands Chapter 1 MAC Address Table Configuration Commands Note: This chapter describes the management of static and dynamic MAC address entries. For information on the management of multicast MAC address entries, refer to the section related to multicast protocol in the 3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide. 1.1 MAC Address Table Configuration Commands 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MAC Address Table Chapter 1 MAC Address Table Configuration Commands System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] bridgemactocpu enable 1.1.2 display mac-address aging-time Syntax display mac-address aging-time View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display mac-address aging-time command to display the aging time for the dynamic MAC address entries in the MAC address table.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MAC Address Table Chapter 1 MAC Address Table Configuration Commands Table 1-1 Description on the display-option argument Value Description mac-address [ vlan vlan-id ] Displays information about a specified MAC address entry. { static | dynamic } [ interface interface-type interface-number ] [ vlan vlan-id ] [ count ] Displays information about dynamic or static address entries.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MAC Address Table Chapter 1 MAC Address Table Configuration Commands 00e0-0112-9a86 2 Config static Ethernet3/0/11 NOAGED 000c-760a-172d 1 Learned Ethernet1/0/4 240 000d-88f6-44c1 1 Learned Ethernet1/0/4 278 000d-88f7-9f7d 1 Learned Ethernet1/0/4 278 000d-88f7-b090 1 Learned Ethernet1/0/4 128 000d-88f7-b094 1 Learned Ethernet1/0/4 278 000d-88f8-4e88 1 Learned Ethernet1/0/4 203 --- 7 mac address(es) found on port Ethernet
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MAC Address Table Chapter 1 MAC Address Table Configuration Commands dynamic: Specifies that the MAC address entry to be added/updated is of dynamic type. mac-address: MAC address. interface-type: Port type. interface-number: Port number. vlan-id: VLAN ID. This argument ranges from 1 to 4094. mac-address-attribute: String used to specify the MAC address entries to be removed, as described in Table 1-3.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MAC Address Table Chapter 1 MAC Address Table Configuration Commands z MAC address: 00e0-fc01-0101 z Outbound port: Ethernet1/0/1 port z Ethernet1/0/1 port belongs to VLAN 2. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] mac-address static 00e0-fc01-0101 interface Ethernet 1/0/1 vlan 2 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MAC Address Table Chapter 1 MAC Address Table Configuration Commands Parameter None Description Use the mac-address mac-learning disable command to disable the current port from learning MAC addresses. Use the undo mac-address mac-learning disable command to re-enable the current port to learn MAC addresses. By default, the port is enabled to learn MAC addresses. Note: z Do not use the mac-address mac-learning disable command together with any 802.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MAC Address Table Chapter 1 MAC Address Table Configuration Commands Use the undo mac-address max-mac-count command to cancel the limitation on the number of MAC addresses an Ethernet port can learn. By default, the number of MAC addresses an Ethernet port can learn is unlimited.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MAC Address Table Chapter 1 MAC Address Table Configuration Commands removed, the switch broadcasts the packet through all its ports in the VLAN which the packet belongs to. This decreases the operating performance of the switch. z If the aging time is too long, MAC address entries may still exist even if they turn invalid. This causes the switch to be unable to update its MAC address table in time.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands ............................................................................... 1-1 1.1 MSTP Configuration Commands ....................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 active region-configuration ...................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.2 check region-configuration ...............
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Table of Contents 1.1.37 stp root secondary............................................................................................... 1-39 1.1.38 stp root-protection ............................................................................................... 1-40 1.1.39 stp tc-protection................................................................................................... 1-41 1.1.40 stp timer forward-delay........................
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands 1.1 MSTP Configuration Commands 1.1.1 active region-configuration Syntax active region-configuration View MST region view Parameter None Description Use the active region-configuration command to activate the settings of an MST (multiple spanning tree) region.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands 1.1.2 check region-configuration Syntax check region-configuration View MST region view Parameter None Description Use the check region-configuration command to display the current MST region configuration, including region name, revision level, and VLAN mapping table. MSTP-enabled switches are in the same region only when they have the same MST region-related configuration.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the check region-configuration command Field Description Format selector The selector specified by MSTP Region name The name of the MST region Revision level The revision level of the MST region Instance Vlans Mapped Spanning tree instance-to-VLAN mappings in the MST region 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands If only a port list is specified, the command displays information about all spanning z tree instances on these ports in the order of the port number. If both a spanning tree instance and a port list are specified, the command z displays spanning tree information about the specified spanning tree instance and the specified ports in order of spanning tree instance ID.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands Field Description Role Port role STP State STP state on the port, which can be forwarding and discarding. Protection Protection type of the port 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands Field Description Revision level The revision level of the MST region Instance Vlans Mapped Spanning tree instance-to-VLAN mappings in the MST region 1.1.5 instance Syntax instance instance-id vlan vlan-list undo instance instance-id [ vlan vlan-list ] View MST region view Parameter instance-id: ID of a spanning tree instance ranging from 0 to 16. A value of 0 specifies the CIST. vlan-list: List of VLANs.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands Note that a VLAN cannot be mapped to multiple spanning tree instances at the same time. A VLAN-to-spanning tree instance mapping is automatically removed if you map the VLAN to another spanning tree instance. Related command: region-name, revision-level, vlan-mapping modulo, check region-configuration, and active region-configuration. Example # Map VLAN 2 to spanning tree instance 1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands 1.1.7 reset stp Syntax reset stp [ interface interface-list ] View User view Parameter interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where &<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for this argument.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands Description Use the revision-level command to set the MSTP revision level for a switch. Use the undo revision-level command to revert to the default revision level. By default, the MSTP revision level is 0. MSTP revision level, along with MST region name and VLAN mapping table, determines the MST region which a switch belongs to.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands Related command: stp mode, and stp interface. Example # Enable MSTP globally. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] stp enable # Disable MSTP on Ethernet1/0/1 port. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] interface ethernet 1/0/1 [3Com-Ethernet1/0/1] stp disable 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands receive configuration BPDUs and then reports these cases to the administrator. If a port is shut down, only the administrator can restore it. Example # Enable the BPDU protection function. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] stp bpdu-protection 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands [3Com] stp bridge-diameter 5 1.1.12 stp config-digest-snooping Syntax stp config-digest-snooping undo stp config-digest-snooping View System view Parameter None Description Use the stp config-digest-snooping command to enable the digest snooping feature. Use the undo stp config-digest-snooping command to disable the digest snooping feature. The digest snooping feature is disabled by default.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands Note: z The digest snooping feature is needed only when your Switch 7750 is connected to partner's proprietary protocol-adopted switches. z To enable the digest snooping feature successfully, you must first enable it on all the switch ports that connect to partner's proprietary protocol-adopted switches and then enable it globally.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands Description Use the stp cost command to set the path cost of the current port in a specified spanning tree instance. Use the undo stp cost command to revert to the default path cost of the current port in the specified spanning tree instance. By default, a switch automatically calculates the path costs of a port in different spanning tree instances based on a specified standard.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands Use the stp edged-port disable command to configure the current Ethernet port as a non-edge port. Use the undo stp edged-port command to restore the current Ethernet port to its default state. By default, all Ethernet ports of a switch are non-edge ports. An edge port is a port that is directly connected to a user terminal instead of another switch or a network segment.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands Parameter interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where &<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for this argument. enable: Enables MSTP on the specified ports.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands Parameter interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by providing this argument in the format of interface-list ={ interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where &<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for this argument.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands Note: z The digest snooping feature is needed only when your Switch 7750 series switch is connected to partner's proprietary protocol-adopted switches. z To enable the digest snooping feature successfully, you must first enable it on all the ports of your Switch 7750 series switch that are connected to partner's proprietary protocol-adopted switches and then enable it globally.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands Description Use the stp interface cost command to set the path cost(s) of the specified port(s) in a specified spanning tree instance in system view. Use the undo stp interface cost command to revert to the default path cost(s) of the specified port(s) in the specified spanning tree instance in system view.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands disable: Configures the specified Ethernet ports to be non-edge ports. Description Use the stp interface edged-port enable command to configure the specified Ethernet port(s) as edge ports in system view. Use the stp interface edged-port disable command to configure the specified Ethernet port(s) as non-edge ports in system view.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands undo stp interface interface-list loop-protection View System view Parameter interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where &<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for this argument.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands Parameter interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where &<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for this argument.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands The rapid transition feature is disabled on any port by default. Some manufactures' switches adopt proprietary spanning tree protocols that are similar to RSTP in the way to implement rapid transition on designated ports. When a switch of this kind operates as the upstream switch of an Switch 7750 series switch running MSTP, the upstream designated port fails to change their states rapidly.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands interface-type interface-number ] } &<1-10>, where &<1-10> means that you can provide up to 10 port indexes/port index ranges for this argument. force-true: Specifies that the links connected to the specified Ethernet ports are point-to-point links. force-false: Specifies that the links connected to the specified Ethernet ports are not point-to-point links.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands 1.1.23 stp interface port priority Syntax stp interface interface-list instance instance-id port priority priority undo stp interface interface-list instance instance-id port priority View System view Parameter interface-list: Ethernet port list.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands 1.1.24 stp interface root-protection Syntax stp interface interface-list root-protection undo stp interface interface-list root-protection View System view Parameter interface-list: Ethernet port list.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands Example # Enable the root protection function on Ethernet1/0/1 port. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] stp interface Ethernet 1/0/1 root-protection 1.1.25 stp interface transmit-limit Syntax stp interface interface-list transmit-limit packetnum undo stp interface interface-list transmit-limit View System view Parameter interface-list: Ethernet port list.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands 1.1.26 stp loop-protection Syntax stp loop-protection undo stp loop-protection View Ethernet port view Parameter None Description Use the stp loop-protection command to enable the loop prevention function on the current port. Use the undo stp loop-protection command to restore the loop prevention function to the default state on the current port. By default, the loop prevention function is disabled.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands 1.1.27 stp max-hops Syntax stp max-hops hops undo stp max-hops View System view Parameter hops: Maximum hops to be set. This argument ranges from 1 to 40. The default maximum hops value of an MST region is 20. Description Use the stp max-hops command to set the maximum hops for the MST region the current switch belongs to. Use the undo stp max-hops command to revert to the default maximum hops.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands 1.1.28 stp mcheck Syntax stp mcheck View Ethernet port view Parameter None Description Use the stp mcheck command to perform the mCheck operation on the current port. When a port on an MSTP-enabled upstream switch connects with an STP enabled downstream switch, the port transits to the STP-compatible mode.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands View System view Parameter stp: Enables the STP-compatible mode. mstp: Enables the MSTP mode. rstp: Enables RSTP-compatible. Description Use the stp mode command to set the MSTP operation mode. Use the undo stp mode command to revert to the default MSTP operation mode. By default, a switch operates in MSTP mode.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands Description Use the stp no-agreement-check command to enable the rapid transition feature for a port. Use the stp no-agreement-check command to disable the rapid transition feature. By default, the rapid transition feature is disabled on a port. Some manufactures' switches adopt proprietary spanning tree protocols that are similar to RSTP in the way to implement rapid transition on designated ports.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands View System view Parameter dot1d-1998: Uses the IEEE 802.1D-1998 standard to calculate the default path costs of ports. dot1t: Uses the IEEE 802.1t standard to calculate the default path costs of ports. legacy: Uses the proprietary standard to calculate the default path costs of ports.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands Normally, when a port operates in full-duplex mode, the corresponding path cost is slightly less than that when the port operates in half-duplex mode. When calculating the path cost of an aggregated link, the 802.1D-1998 standard does not take the number of the ports on the aggregated link into account, whereas the 802.1T standard does.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands Description Use the stp point-to-point command to specify whether the link connected to the current Ethernet port is a point-to-point link. Use the undo stp point-to-point command to restore the link connected to the current Ethernet port to its default link type, which is automatically determined by MSTP.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands port priority priority: Sets the port priority. The priority argument ranges from 0 to 240 and must be a multiple of 16 (such as 0, 16, and 32). The default port priority of a port in any spanning tree instance is 128. Description Use the stp port priority command to set the port priority of the current port in the specified spanning tree instance.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands Description Use the stp priority command to set the priority of the switch in the specified spanning tree instance. Use the undo stp priority command to restore the switch to the default priority in the specified spanning tree instance. The default priority of a switch is 32,768. The priorities of switches are used for spanning tree generation. Switch priorities are spanning tree-specific.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands And you can modify the three settings after entering MST region view by using the stp region-configuration command. Example # Enter MST region view. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] stp region-configuration [3Com-mst-region] 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands recommended to set the network diameter and leave the Forward delay and Max age parameters being automatically determined by the network diameter you set. Caution: z You can configure only one root bridge for a spanning tree instance and can configure one or more secondary root bridges for a spanning tree instance.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands Description Use the stp root secondary command to configure the current switch as a secondary root bridge of a specified spanning tree instance. Use the undo stp root command to cancel the current configuration. By default, a switch does not operate as a secondary root bridge. If you do not specify the instance-id argument, these two commands apply to the CIST.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands Use the undo stp root-protection command to restore the root protection function to the default state on the current port. By default, the root protection function is disabled. Configuration errors or attacks may result in configuration BPDUs with their priorities higher than that of a root bridge, which causes new root bridge to be elected and network topology jitter to occur.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands A switch removes MAC address entries and ARP entries upon receiving TC-BPDUs. If a malicious user sends a large amount of TC-BPDUs to a switch in a short period, the switch may busy itself in removing MAC address entries and ARP entries, which may decreases the performance and stability of the switch.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands As for the configuration of the three time-related parameters (that is, the Hello time, Forward delay, and Max age parameters), the following formulas must be met to prevent network jitter.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands As for the configuration of the three time-related parameters (that is, the Hello time, Forward delay, and Max age parameters), the following formulas must be met to prevent network jitter.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands As for the configuration of the three time-related parameters (that is, the Hello time, Forward delay, and Max age parameters), the following formulas must be met to prevent network jitter. 2 * (Forward delay – 1 second) >= Max age, Max age >= 2 * (Hello time + 1 second).
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands Spanning trees may be regenerated even in a steady network if an upstream switch continues to be busy. You can configure the timeout time factor to a larger number to avoid this. Normally, the timeout time can be four (or more) times of the Hello time. For a steady network, the timeout time can be five to seven times of the Hello time. Example # Set the Hello time factor to 7.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands 1.1.45 vlan-mapping modulo Syntax vlan-mapping modulo modulo View MST region view Parameter modulo: Modulo ranging from 1 to 16. Description Use the vlan-mapping modulo command to map VLANs to specific spanning tree instances. By default, all VLANs in a network are mapped to the CIST (spanning tree instance 0). MSTP uses a VLAN mapping table to describe VLAN-to-spanning-tree-instance mappings.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – MSTP Chapter 1 MSTP Configuration Commands System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] stp region-configuration [3Com-mst-region] vlan-mapping modulo 16 1.1.46 vlan-vpn tunnel Syntax vlan-vpn tunnel undo vlan-vpn tunnel View System view Parameter None Description Use the vlan-vpn tunnel command to enable the BPDU Tunnel function for a switch. Use the undo vlan-vpn tunnel command to disable the BPDU Tunnel function.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 Static Route Configuration Commands .................................................................... 1-1 1.1 Routing Table Monitoring Commands ............................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 display ip routing-table ............................................................................................ 1-1 1.1.2 display ip routing-table acl....
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Table of Contents 2.1.21 rip work................................................................................................................ 2-19 2.1.22 summary.............................................................................................................. 2-19 2.1.23 timers................................................................................................................... 2-20 2.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Table of Contents 3.1.37 ospf timer dead.................................................................................................... 3-43 3.1.38 ospf timer hello .................................................................................................... 3-44 3.1.39 ospf timer poll ...................................................................................................... 3-45 3.1.40 ospf timer retransmit .......
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Table of Contents 4.1.26 isis timer holding-multiplier.................................................................................. 4-24 4.1.27 isis timer lsp......................................................................................................... 4-25 4.1.28 isis timer retransmit ............................................................................................. 4-25 4.1.29 is-level .........................
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Table of Contents 5.1.23 display bgp routing-table peer............................................................................. 5-24 5.1.24 display bgp routing-table regular-expression ...................................................... 5-24 5.1.25 display bgp routing-table statistic ........................................................................ 5-25 5.1.26 filter-policy export ............................................
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Table of Contents Chapter 6 IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands............................................................ 6-1 6.1 IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands ..................................................................... 6-1 6.1.1 apply as-path........................................................................................................... 6-1 6.1.2 apply community ......................................
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 1 Static Route Configuration Commands Chapter 1 Static Route Configuration Commands Note: The words “router” covered in the following text represent routers in common sense and Ethernet switches running a routing protocol. To improve readability, this will not be mentioned again in this manual. 1.1 Routing Table Monitoring Commands 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 1 Static Route Configuration Commands 2.2.2.1/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0 3.3.3.0/24 DIRECT 0 0 3.3.3.1 Vlan-interface3 3.3.3.1/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 4.4.4.0/24 DIRECT 0 0 4.4.4.1 Vlan-interface4 4.4.4.1/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0 127.0.0.0/8 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0 127.0.0.1/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 1 Static Route Configuration Commands Example # Display the brief information about the active routes filtered by the basic ACL 2000. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] acl number 2000 [3Com-acl-basic-2000] rule permit source 10.1.1.1 0.0.0.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 1 Static Route Configuration Commands Field Description Mask Mask Protocol Routing protocol that detects this route Preference Preference of the route Nexthop Address of the next hop Interface Outbound interface where packets to the destination network segment are forwarded.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 1 Static Route Configuration Commands Field Description Static The static routes manually configured on the route are tagged as static routes, which will not be removed from the routing table if the router is restarted after the save command is executed. Unicast Unicast routes Age The time that a route exists in the routing table, expressed in the form of hh:mm:ss. Cost Route cost Tag Route tag 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol z Chapter 1 Static Route Configuration Commands display ip routing-table ip-address mask This command only displays the routes exactly matching the specified destination address and mask. z display ip routing-table ip-address longer-match This command displays all destination address routes matching the specified destination address in the natural mask range.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Age: 3:47 Cost: 0/0 Chapter 1 Static Route Configuration Commands Tag: 0 # There is no corresponding route in the natural mask range (only the longest matched route is displayed). Display the detailed information. <3Com> display ip routing-table 169.253.0.0 verbose Routing Tables: Generate Default: no + = Active Route, - = Last Active, # = Both * = Next hop in use Summary count:1 **Destination: 169.0.0.0 Protocol: #Static Mask: 255.0.0.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 1 Static Route Configuration Commands Example # Display the routing information of destination addresses ranging from 1.1.1.0 to 2.2.2.0. <3Com>display ip routing-table 1.1.1.0 24 2.2.2.0 24 Routing tables: Summary count: 3 Destination/Mask Protocol 1.1.1.0/24 DIRECT Pre Cost 0 0 Nexthop 1.1.1.1/32 DIRECT 0 0 127.0.0.1 2.2.2.0/24 DIRECT 0 0 2.2.2.1 1.1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 1 Static Route Configuration Commands <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] ip ip-prefix abc2 permit 10.1.1.0 24 less-equal 32 [3Com] display ip routing-table ip-prefix abc2 Routes matched by ip-prefix abc2: Summary count: 2 Destination/Mask Protocol Pre Cost 10.1.1.0/24 DIRECT 0 10.1.1.2/32 DIRECT 0 0 0 Nexthop Interface 10.1.1.2 127.0.0.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 1 Static Route Configuration Commands View Any view Parameter protocol: You can provide one of the following values for this argument. z direct: Displays direct-connect route information z static: Displays static route information. z bgp: Displays BGP route information z isis: Displays IS-IS route information. z ospf: Displays OSPF route information. z ospf-ase: Displays OSPF ASE route information.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 1 Static Route Configuration Commands Summary count: 1 Destination/Mask Protocol Pre Cost Nexthop Interface 100.100.1.1/32 DIRECT 0 100.100.1.1 LoopBack0 0 # Display the static routing table.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol | | | | | | | | | | +--6+ | Chapter 1 Static Route Configuration Commands | +-32+--{2.2.2.2 +-22+ +-32+--{2.2.1.1 +--8+--{1.0.0.0 | +-32+--{1.1.1.1 Table 1-3 Description on the fields of the display ip routing-table radix command Field Description INET Address suite inodes Number of nodes routes Number of routes 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 1 Static Route Configuration Commands RIP 0 0 0 0 IS-IS 0 0 0 0 OSPF 0 0 0 0 O_ASE 0 0 0 0 O_NSSA 0 0 0 0 AGGRE 0 0 0 0 Total 28 5 29 1 Table 1-4 Description on the fields of the display ip routing-table statistics command Field Description Proto Routing protocol. O_ASE stands for OSPF_ASE routes; O_NSSA stands for OSPF NSSA routes; AGGRE stands for aggregated routes.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 1 Static Route Configuration Commands Then, the statistics of the entire routing table will be output. Finally, the verbose description of each route will be output. The display ip routing-table verbose command can display all current routes, including inactive routes and invalid routes. Example # Display the verbose routing table information.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 1 Static Route Configuration Commands 1.2 Static Route Configuration Commands 1.2.1 delete static-routes all Syntax delete static-routes all View System view Parameter None Description Use the delete static-routes all command to delete all static routes. The system will request your confirmation before it deletes all the configured static routes. Related command: ip route-static and display ip routing-table.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 1 Static Route Configuration Commands mask-length: Mask length. Since 1s in a 32-bit mask must be consecutive, a mask in dotted decimal notation can be replaced by mask-length, which is the number of the consecutive 1s in the mask. interface-type interface-number: Next-hop outgoing interface. The packets sent to a null interface, which is a virtual interface, will be discarded immediately. This can decrease the system load.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 1 Static Route Configuration Commands 1.2.3 ip route-static default-preference Syntax ip route-static default-preference default-preference-value undo ip route-static default-preference View System view Parameter default-preference-value: Default precedence of the static routes, in the range of 1 to 255. It is 60 by default.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 2 RIP Configuration Commands Chapter 2 RIP Configuration Commands Note: The word “router” covered in the following text represent routers in common sense and Ethernet switches running a routing protocol. To improve readability, this will not be mentioned again in this manual. 2.1 RIP Configuration Commands 2.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 2 RIP Configuration Commands System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] rip [3Com-rip] undo checkzero 2.1.2 default cost Syntax default cost value undo default cost View RIP view Parameter value: Default routing cost to be set, ranging from 1 to 16. It is 1 by default. Description Use the default cost command to set the default routing cost of imported routes.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 2 RIP Configuration Commands Description Use the display rip command to display the current RIP operation state and RIP configuration. Example # Display the current RIP operation state and configuration.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 2 RIP Configuration Commands View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display rip routing command to display RIP routing information. Example # Display RIP routing table information. <3Com> display rip routing RIP routing table: public net A = Active I = Inactive G=Garbage collection Destination/Mask Cost NextHop Age SourceGateway Att 6.0.0.0/8 1 4s 10.153.25.22 A 10.153.25.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 2 RIP Configuration Commands 2.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 2 RIP Configuration Commands [3Com] rip [3Com-rip] filter-policy 2000 export 2.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 2 RIP Configuration Commands You can control the range of routes received by RIP by specifying an ACL, ip-prefix list and routing policies. Related command: acl, filter-policy export, ip ip-prefix. Example # Configure to filter incoming routing information by acl 2000. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] rip [3Com-rip] filter-policy 2000 import 2.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 2 RIP Configuration Commands 2.1.8 import-route Syntax import-route protocol [ cost value | route-policy route-policy-name ]* undo import-route protocol View RIP view Parameter protocol: Source routing protocol whose routes will be imported by RIP. At present, RIP can import the following types of routes: direct, ospf, ospf-ase, ospf-nssa, static, isis and bgp.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 2 RIP Configuration Commands [3Com-rip] import-route static cost 4 # Set the default cost and import OSPF routes with the default cost. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] rip [3Com-rip] default cost 3 [3Com-rip] import-route ospf 2.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 2 RIP Configuration Commands Related command: rip work. Example # Enable RIP on the interface with the network address 129.102.0.0. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] rip [3Com-rip] network 129.102.0.0 2.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 2 RIP Configuration Commands 2.1.11 preference Syntax preference value undo preference View RIP view Parameter value: Preference level, ranging from 1 to 255. By default, the value is 100. Description Use the preference command to configure the route preference of RIP. Use the undo preference command to restore the default preference. Every routing protocol has its own preference.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 2 RIP Configuration Commands When you need to re-configure the parameters of RIP, you can use this command to restore the default setting. Example # Reset the RIP system configuration. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] rip [3Com-rip] reset % Reset RIP's configuration and restart RIP? [Y/N]y 2.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 2 RIP Configuration Commands System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] rip [3Com-rip] 2.1.14 rip authentication-mode Syntax rip authentication-mode { simple password | md5 { rfc2453 key-string | rfc2082 key-string key-id } } undo rip authentication-mode View Interface view Parameter simple: Specifies to use simple text authentication mode. password: Simple text authentication key, containing 1 to 16 characters.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 2 RIP Configuration Commands Example # Specify the interface Vlan-interface 10 to use the simple authentication with the authentication key of aaa. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 2 RIP Configuration Commands <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com]interface Vlan-interface 10 [3Com-Vlan-interface10] undo rip input 2.1.16 rip metricin Syntax rip metricin value undo rip metricin View Interface view Parameter value: Additional route metric added when receiving a RIP route, ranging from 0 to 16. By default, the value is 0.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 2 RIP Configuration Commands Parameter value: Additional route metric added when transmitting a RIP route, ranging from 1 to 16. By default, the value is 1. Description Use the rip metricout command to configure the additional route metric added to the RIP routes to be transmitted on an interface. Use the undo rip metricout command to restore the default value of this additional route metric.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 2 RIP Configuration Commands Use the undo rip output command to disable an interface from transmitting RIP packets. By default, all interfaces except loopback interfaces are enabled to transmit RIP packets to the external. This command is used in cooperation with another two commands: rip input and rip work . Functionally, rip work is equivalent to rip input & rip output.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 2 RIP Configuration Commands Example # Specify the interface Vlan-interface 10 not to use split horizon when processing RIP packets. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] interface Vlan-interface 10 [3Com-Vlan-interface10] undo rip split-horizon 2.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 2 RIP Configuration Commands System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] interface Vlan-interface 10 [3Com-Vlan-interface10] rip version 2 broadcast 2.1.21 rip work Syntax rip work undo rip work View Interface view Parameter None Description Use the rip work command to enable RIP to transmit and receive RIP packets on an interface.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 2 RIP Configuration Commands View RIP view Parameter None Description Use the summary command to enable RIP-2 automatic route aggregation. Use the undo summary command to disable RIP-2 automatic route aggregation. By default, RIP-2 route aggregation is enabled. Route aggregation can be used to reduce the routing traffic on the network as well as to reduce the size of the routing table.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 2 RIP Configuration Commands Parameter update-timer: Value of the Period Update timer, ranging from 1 to 3,600 seconds. By default, it is 30 seconds. timeout-timer: Value of the Timeout timer, ranging from 1 to 3,600 seconds. By default, it is 180 seconds. Description Use the timers command to modify the values of the three RIP timers: Period Update, Timeout, and Garbage-collection.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 2 RIP Configuration Commands Description Use the traffic-share-across-interface command to enable traffic sharing across RIP interfaces, so as to distribute traffic evenly over equal-cost routes across the interfaces on a router. Use the undo traffic-share-across-interface command to cancel traffic sharing. By default, traffic sharing across RIP interfaces is disabled. Example # Enable traffic sharing across RIP interfaces.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Note: The words “router” covered in the following text represent routers in common sense and Ethernet switches running a routing protocol. To improve readability, this will not be mentioned again in this manual. 3.1 OSPF Configuration Commands 3.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands route aggregation. You can configure multiple aggregation routes in an area so that OSPF can aggregate multiple network segments. Example # Aggregate the routes in the two network segments, 36.42.10.0 and 36.42.110.0, in OSPF area 1 into one summary route 36.42.0.0 and transmit it to other areas. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands 3.1.3 asbr-summary Syntax asbr-summary ip-address mask [ not-advertise | tag value ] undo asbr-summary ip-address mask View OSPF view Parameter ip-address: IP address to be matched, in dotted decimal notation. mask: IP address mask, in dotted decimal notation. not-advertise: Specifies not to advertise the aggregated route matching the specified IP address and mask.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands 3.1.4 authentication-mode Syntax authentication-mode { simple | md5 } undo authentication-mode View OSPF Area view Parameter simple: Uses simple text authentication mode. md5: Uses MD5 cipher text authentication mode. Description Use the authentication-mode command to configure one area of OSPF to support the authentication attribute.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands 3.1.5 default cost Syntax default cost value undo default cost View OSPF view Parameter value: Default routing cost of external route imported by OSPF, ranging from 0 to 16,777,214. By default, its value is 1. Description Use the default cost command to configure the default cost for OSPF to import external routes.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Parameter seconds: Default interval, in seconds, of importing external routes. It ranges from 1 to 2147483647 and defaults to 1. Description Use the default interval command to configure the default interval for OSPF to import external routes. Use the undo default interval command to restore the default value of the default interval of importing external routes.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands device. Therefore, it is necessary to limit the number of external routes imported during each import interval. Related command: default interval. Example # Specify the default limit on the number of external routes imported by OSPF in each import interval as 200. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] ospf 1 [3Com-ospf-1] default limit 200 3.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands 3.1.9 default type Syntax default type { 1 | 2 } undo default type View OSPF view Parameter type 1: External routes of type 1. type 2: External routes of type 2. Description Use the default type command to configure the default type when OSPF imports external routes. Use the undo default type command to restore the default type when OSPF imports external routes.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Parameter value: Cost value of the default route transmitted by OSPF to the STUB or NSSA area. It ranges from 0 to 16,777,214 and defaults to 1. Description Use the default-cost command to configure the cost of the default route transmitted by OSPF to the STUB or NSSA area. Use the undo default-cost command to restore the default cost of the default route transmitted by OSPF to the STUB or NSSA area.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Parameter always: Generates an ase lsa describing the default route and advertises it if the local router is not configured with the default route. If this keyword is not provided, the local router must be configured with the default route before it can import the ase lsa, which generates the default route. cost value: Specifies the cost value of this ase lsa.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands 3.1.12 display ospf abr-asbr Syntax display ospf [ process-id ] abr-asbr View Any view Parameter process-id: OSPF Process ID, in the range of 1 to 65,535. If you do not specify a process ID, this command applies to all current OSPF processes. Description Use the display ospf abr-asbr command to display the information about the ABR and ASBR of OSPF.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands View Any view Parameter process-id: OSPF Process ID, in the range of 1 to 65,535. If you do not specify a process ID, this command applies to all current OSPF processes. ip-address: Matched IP address, in dotted decimal notation. mask: IP address mask, in dotted decimal notation. Description Use the display ospf asbr-summary command to display the summary information of OSPF imported route.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Table 3-2 Description on the fields of the display ospf asbr-summary command. Field Description net Destination network segment mask Mask tag Tag Status information, which takes one of the following two values: status DoNotAdv ertise The summary routing information to the network segment will not be advertised.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Area 0.0.0.0: Authtype: none Flags: <> SPF scheduled: Interface: 110.1.1.1 (Vlan-interface110) Cost: 11 State: DR Type: Broadcast Priority: 11 Designated Router: 110.1.1.1 Backup Designated Router: 110.1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Field Description OSPF timers, defined as follows: Timers Transmit Delay Hello Interval of hello packet Dead Interval of dead neighbors Poll Interval of poll Retransmit Interval of retransmitting LSA Delay time of transmitting LSA 3.1.15 display ospf cumulative Syntax display ospf [ process-id ] cumulative View Any view Parameter process-id: OSPF Process ID, in the range of 1 to 65,535.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol LSAs Originated: 146 Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands LSAs Received: 161905 Area 0.0.0.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands View Any view Parameter process-id: OSPF Process ID, in the range of 1 to 65,535. If you do not specify a process ID, this command applies to all current OSPF processes. Description Use the display ospf error command to display OSPF error information. Example # Display the OSPF error information. <3Com> display ospf error OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 1.1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Field Description OSPF: wrong version OSPF version error OSPF: wrong checksum OSPF checksum error OSPF: wrong area id OSPF area ID error OSPF: area mismatch OSPF area mismatch OSPF: wrong virtual link OSPF virtual link error OSPF: wrong authentication type OSPF authentication type error OSPF: wrong authentication key OSPF authentication key error OSPF: too small packet OSPF packet too
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Field Description LS REQ: neighbor state low Link state request (LS REQ) packet: asynchronous neighbor state LS REQ: empty request Link state request packet: empty request LS REQ: wrong request Link state request packet: erroneous request LS UPD: neighbor state low Link state update packet: asynchronous neighbor state LS UPD: newer self-generate LSA Link state update packet: newer LSA genera
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Description Use the display ospf interface command to display the OSPF interface information. If the verbose keyword is provided, the detailed information about the OSPF interface is displayed. Example # Display the OSPF interface information of Vlan-interface1. <3Com> display ospf interface vlan-interface 1 OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 1.1.1.1 Interfaces Interface: 10.110.10.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Table 3-6 Description on the fields of the display ospf interface command Field Description Cost Cost of the interface State State of the interface state machine Type Network type of OSPF Priority Priority of DR for interface election Designated Router DR on the network in which the interface resides Backup Designated Router BDR on the network in which the interface resides OSPF timers, de
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands asbr: Displays the brief information about Type-4 LSAs (summary-Asbr-LSAs) advertised by ASBR routers in the LSDB. ase: Displays the brief information about the Type-5 LSAs (AS-external-LSAs) in the LSDB. This argument is unavailable if you have provided a value for area-id. network: Displays the brief information about the Type-2 LSAs (network-LSAs) in the LSDB.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands SNet 10.153.17.0 1.1.1.1 355 28 80000003 10 Inter List ASB 1.1.1.1 355 28 80000003 10 SumAsb List 2.2.2.2 AS External Database: Type LinkState ID AdvRouter Age Len Sequence Metric Where ASE 10.153.18.0 1.1.1.1 1006 36 ASE 10.153.16.0 2.2.2.2 798 36 80000002 1 Uninitialized ASE 10.153.17.0 2.2.2.2 623 36 80000003 1 Uninitialized ASE 10.153.17.0 1.1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Table 3-8 Description on the fields of the display ospf lsdb ase command Field Description type Type of the LSA ls id Link state ID of the LSA adv rtr Router ID of the router that advertises the LSA ls age Age of the LSA len Length of the LSA seq# Sequence number of the LSA chksum Checksum of the LSA Options Options of the LSA Net mask Network mask E type Type of external route Fo
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Next hops: Address Type Refcount Intf Addr Intf Name --------------------------------------------------------------202.38.160.1 Direct 3 202.38.160.1 Vlan-interface2 202.38.160.2 Neighbor 1 202.38.160.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Neighbors Area 0.0.0.0 interface 10.153.17.88(Vlan-interface1)'s neighbor(s) RouterID: 2.2.2.2 State: Full Address: 10.153.17.89 Mode: Nbr is Master DR: 10.153.17.89 Priority: 1 BDR: 10.153.17.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Field Description Attempt It is enabled in an NBMA environment, such as Frame Relay, X.25 or ATM. It indicates that OSPF router does not receive the message from a certain neighbor router within a period of time, but still attempts to send Hello packet to the adjacent routers for their communications with a lower frequency.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Example # Display the information about the OSPF request-queue. <3Com> display ospf request-queue OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 1.1.1.1 Request List The Router's Neighbor is RouterID: 10.1.1.1 Address: 120.1.1.1 Interface: 120.1.1.2 Area: 0.0.0.0 Request list: LSID:151.14.83.0 AdvRouter:5.4.0.0 Sequence:8000002a Age:545 LSID:151.10.91.0 AdvRouter:5.4.0.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Description Use the display ospf retrans-queue command to display the information about the OSPF retransmission queue. Example # Display the information about the OSPF retransmission queue. <3Com> display ospf retrans-queue OSPF Process 200 with Router ID 103.160.1.1 Retransmit List The Router's Neighbors is RouterID: 162.162.162.162 Address: 103.169.2.2 Interface: 103.169.2.5 Area: 0.0.0.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Description Use the display ospf routing command to display the information about OSPF routing table. Example # Display OSPF routing information. <3Com> display ospf routing OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 1.1.1.1 Routing Tables Routing for Network Destination Cost Type NextHop 10.110.0.0/16 1 Net 10.10.0.0/16 1 Stub 10.10.0.1 AdvRouter 10.110.10.1 1.1.1.1 0.0.0.0 3.3.3.3 0.0.0.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Parameter process-id: OSPF Process ID, in the range of 1 to 65,535. If you do not specify a process ID, this command applies to all current OSPF processes. Description Use the display ospf vlink command to display the information about OSPF virtual links. Example # Display OSPF virtual link information. <3Com> display ospf vlink OSPF Process 1 with Router ID 1.1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands 3.1.25 filter-policy export Syntax filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } export [ protocol ] undo filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name} export [ protocol ] View OSPF view Parameter acl-number: Basic or advanced ACL number, in the range of 2,000 to 3,999. ip-prefix-name: Name of the address prefix list, containing 1 to 19 characters.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands [3Com-acl-basic-2000] rule deny source any [3Com-ospf-1] filter-policy 2000 export 3.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Example # Filter the received routing information according to the rule defined by ACL 2000. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] acl number 2000 [3Com-acl-basic-2000] rule permit source 20.0.0.0 0.255.255.255 [3Com-acl-basic-2000] rule deny source any [3Com-ospf-1] filter-policy 2000 import 3.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Note: You are recommended to configure the route type, cost and tag together in one command. When you configure them individually, the new configuration for an attribute will overwrite the old configuration for the attribute. By default, the routing information of other protocols is not imported.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Example # Specify the interfaces whose master IP addresses are in the segment range of 10.110.36.0 to run OSPF and specify the number of the OSPF area (where these interfaces reside) as 6. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] ospf 1 [3Com-ospf-1] area 6 [3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.6] network 10.110.36.0 0.0.0.255 3.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Example # Configure area 1 as NSSA area. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] ospf 1 [3Com-ospf-1] area 1 [3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] network 36.0.0.0 0.255.255.255 [3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] nssa 3.1.30 ospf Syntax ospf [ process-id [ router-id router-id ] ] undo ospf [ process-id ] View System view Parameter process-id: OSPF Process ID, ranging from 1 to 65535.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] router id 10.110.1.8 [3Com] ospf 120 [3Com-ospf-120] 3.1.31 ospf authentication-mode Syntax ospf authentication-mode { simple password | md5 key-id key } undo ospf authentication-mode { simple | md5 } View Interface view Parameter simple password: Uses plain text authentication. The password argument is a string of up to eight characters.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] ospf 1 [3Com-ospf-1] area 1 [3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] network 131.119.0.0 0.0.255.255 [3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] authentication-mode md5 [3Com-Vlan-interface10] ospf authentication-mode md5 15 3Com 3.1.32 ospf cost Syntax ospf cost value undo ospf cost View Interface view Parameter value: Cost for running OSPF protocol, ranging from 1 to 65,535.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Parameter dr-priority-value: Interface priority for electing the "designated router", ranging from 0 to 255. The default value is 1. Description Use the ospf dr-priority command to configure the priority for electing the "designated router" on an interface. Use the undo ospf dr-priority command to restore the default value.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Example # Bind MIB operation to OSPF process 100. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] ospf mib-binding 100 # Bind MIB operation to OSPF process 200. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] ospf mib-binding 200 # Cancel the binding of MIB operation. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Example # Configure interface Vlan-interface 3 to write MTU value area when sending DD packets. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] interface Vlan-interface 3 [3Com-Vlan-interface3] ospf mtu-enable 3.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands If there is any router not supporting multicast addresses on a broadcast network, the network type of the interface can be changed to NBMA. Alternatively, the network type of the interface can be changed from NBMA to broadcast. For a non-broadcast multi-accessible network to be of NBMA type, any two routers in the network must be directly reachable to each other through a virtual circuit.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Use the undo ospf timer dead command to restore the default value of the dead interval of the peer. By default, the dead interval is 40 seconds for the OSPF peers of p2p and broadcast interfaces and is 120 seconds for those of p2mp and nbma interfaces.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Example # Configure the interval of transmitting Hello messages on the interface Vlan-interface 10 to 20 seconds. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] interface Vlan-interface 10 [3Com-Vlan-interface10] ospf timer hello 20 3.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands 3.1.40 ospf timer retransmit Syntax ospf timer retransmit interval undo ospf timer retransmit View Interface view Parameter interval: Interval, in seconds, for retransmitting LSA on an interface. It ranges from 1 to 3600 and defaults to 5. Description Use the ospf timer retransmit command to configure the interval for LSA retransmission on an interface.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands View Interface view Parameter seconds: LSA transmission delay on an interface. It ranges from 1 to 3,600 and defaults to 1 (in seconds). Description Use the ospf trans-delay command to configure the LSA transmission delay on an interface. Use the undo ospf trans-delay command to restore the default LSA transmission delay on an interface.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Description Use the peer command to configure the IP address of the neighbor router and specify DR priority on an NBMA network. Use the undo peer command to cancel this configuration. Example # Configure the IP address of the neighbor router as 10.1.1.1. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] ospf 1 [3Com-ospf-1] peer 10.1.1.1 3.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] ospf 1 [3Com-ospf-1] preference ase 160 3.1.44 protocol multicast-mac enable Syntax protocol multicast-mac enable undo protocol multicast-mac enable View System view Parameter None Description Use the protocol multicast-mac enable command to enable protocol multicast MAC address delivery.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Example # Disable protocol multicast MAC address delivery in the system. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com]undo protocol multicast-mac enable 3.1.45 reset ospf Syntax reset ospf [ statistics ] { all | process-id } View User view Parameter all: Resets all OSPF processes. process-id: OSPF Process ID, ranging from 1 to 65535.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands 3.1.46 router id Syntax router id router-id undo router id View System view Parameter router-id: Router ID, in dotted decimal notation, in the range of 0 to 255. Description Use the router id command to configure the ID of a router running the OSPF protocol. Use the undo router id command to cancel the router ID that has been set.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands 3.1.47 silent-interface Syntax silent-interface Vlan-interface Vlan-interface-number undo silent-interface Vlan-interface Vlan-interface-number View OSPF view Parameter Vlan-interface-number: Interface number. Description Use the silent-interface command to disable an interface from transmitting OSPF packet. Use the undo silent-interface command to restore the default setting.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands View System view Parameter process-id: OSPF Process ID, in the range of 1 to 65,535. If you do not specify a process ID, this command applies to all current OSPF processes.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands Parameter interval: SPF calculation interval of OSPF, in seconds. It ranges from 1 to 10 and defaults to 5. Description Use the spf-schedule-interval command to configure the route calculation interval of OSPF. Use the undo spf-schedule-interval command to restore the default setting.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands specify the no-summary argument in the stub command to disable the receiving of type-3 LSAs by the stub area connected to the ABR. Related command: default-cost. Example # Set the type of OSPF area 1 to STUB. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] ospf 1 [3Com-ospf-1] area 1 [3Com-ospf-1-area-0.0.0.1] stub 3.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 3 OSPF Configuration Commands key: MD5 authentication key. If you use simple text authentication key, you can input a string containing 1 to current-configuration 16 characters. When you use the display command to display system information, the MD5 authentication key is displayed in the form of cipher text with a length of 24 characters.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands Note: The router in this document refers to a generic router and an Ethernet switch running routing protocols. 4.1 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands 4.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands Description Use the area-authentication-mode command to configure IS-IS to authenticate the packets (LSP, CSNP and PSNP) received from level-1 route using the predefined mode and password. Use the undo area-authentication-mode command to disable IS-IS from authenticating the received packets above.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands wide-compatible: Specifies to receive both narrow and wide packets, but send only wide packets. relax-spf-metric: Specifies to allow receiving routes with cost bigger than 1,024. If this keyword is not configured, any route with cost larger than 1,024 will be dropped. This configuration is only available when the compatible keyword or when the narrow-compatible keyword is provided.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands This command can be executed on L1 routers or L2 routers. Defaults routes are generated in L2 LSP by default. Carrying out the apply isis level-1 command in routing policy view will generate default routes in L1 LSP. Carrying out the apply isis level-2 command in routing policy view will generate default routes in L2 LSP.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol interval between SPFs: Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands level-1 10 level-2 10 4.1.5 display isis interface Syntax display isis interface [ verbose ] View Any view Parameter verbose: Displays the detailed information about the interface. Description Use the display isis interface command to view the information about the IS-IS-enabled interfaces.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands 4.1.6 display isis lsdb Syntax display isis lsdb [ [ l1 | l2 | level-1 | level-2 ] | [ [ lsp-id | local ] | verbose ]* ]* View Any view Parameter l1, level-1: Specifies level-1 routing connection state database. l2, level-2: Specifies level-2 routing connection state database. lsp-id: LSP ID of the network-entity-title. local: Specifies to display LSP information generated locally.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands You can use this command to view the mesh-group configuration of the current routing interface. Example # Configure the IS-IS-enabled Vlan-interface 10 and Vlan-interface 20 of the router to belong to mesh group 100.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol System ID Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands Interface Circuit ID State HoldTime Type Pri 0000.0000.6502 Vlan-interface1001 0001.0000.6506.02 Up Area Address: 01 IP Address: 6.6.6.6 24s L1 64 Period: 00:53:50 # Display the information about IS-IS neighbors. <3Com> display isis peer System ID Interface Circuit ID State HoldTime Type Pri 0000.0000.6502 Vlan-interface1000 0000.0000.6502.02 Up 9s L1 64 0000.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands I 133.1.0.0/16 20 111.1.1.1 Vlan-interface111 R/-/- I 135.1.0.0/16 20 111.1.1.1 Vlan-interface111 R/-/- D 145.1.0.0/16 10 Direct Vlan-interface145 R/L/- 4.1.10 display isis spf-log Syntax display isis spf-log View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display isis spf-log command to display the log record of IS-IS SPF calculation.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands IS_SPFTRIG_NEWADJ 2 30 0:15:3 IS_SPFTRIG_NEWADJ 2 32 0:14:2 IS_SPFTRIG_NEWADJ 2 202 0:13:34 IS_SPFTRIG_CIRC_DOWN 2 215 0:12:17 IS_SPFTRIG_CIRC_UP 2 27 0:12:7 4.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands instruct the system to follow a specific mode to insert the area-authentication password in all the level-2 routing packets sent from the local node. Related command: area-authentication-mode, and isis authentication-mode. Example # Use the simple mode and set the password to 3Com to authenticate level-2 routing packets. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands Note: z The filter-policy export command takes effect only on the routes imported through the import-route command. If the filter-policy export command is configured while the import-route command is not configured to import other non-IS-IS routes, the filter-policy export command does not take effect.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands Example # Use ACL 2000 to filter the received routes. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] isis [3Com-isis] filter-policy 2000 import 4.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands 4.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands [3Com-isis] import-route static cost 15 4.1.16 import-route isis level-2 into level-1 Syntax import-route isis level-2 into level-1 [ acl acl-number ] undo import-route isis level-2 into level-1 View IS-IS view Parameter acl-number: ACL number in the range of 2000 to 3999. It can be either basic ACLs or advanced ACLs.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands View System view Parameter tag: Name of an IS-IS routing process, consisting of no more than 128 characters. Its length can be 0, that is, the tag argument can be null. Description Use the isis command to start a corresponding IS-IS routing process and enter the IS-IS view. Use the undo isis command to delete the specified IS-IS routing process.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands View Interface view Parameter simple: Specifies to send the password in plain text. md5: Specifies to send the password in ciphertext. password: Specifies a password. For simple authentication mode, the password must be plain text. For md5 authentication mode, the password can be either plain text or ciphertext, and the result depends on the input.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands 4.1.19 isis circuit-level Syntax isis circuit-level [ level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 ] undo isis circuit-level View Interface view Parameter level-1: Specifies to set up only level-1 adjacency for the interface. level-1-2: Specifies to set up level-1-2 adjacency for the interface. level-2: Specifies to set up only level-2 adjacency for the interface.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands 4.1.20 isis cost Syntax isis cost value [ level-1 | level-2 ] undo isis cost [ level-1 | level-2 ] View Interface view Parameter value: Specifies the link cost value for corresponding SPF calculation, in the range of 0 to 63. It is 10 by default. level-1: Indicates the link cost corresponding to Level-1 layer. level-2: Indicates the link cost corresponding to Level-2 layer.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands Parameter value: Specifies the priority for selecting DIS, ranging from 0 to 127, with the default as 64. level-1: Specifies the priority for selecting level-1 DIS. level-2: Specifies the priority for selecting level-2 DIS. If neither level-1 nor level-2 is specified in this command, then the level-1 and level-2 priority is configured by default.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands Use the undo isis enable command to disable this configuration. The interface does not enable the IS-IS routing process by default.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands After an interface is added to a mesh group, it will only flood a received LSP to interfaces not belonging to the same mesh group. When you add an interface to a mesh group or block the interface, make sure to retain some redundancy so that a link failure will not affect the normal LSP packet flooding. Example # Add the IS-IS-enabled Vlan-interface 20 to mesh-group 3.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] interface Vlan-interface 10 [3Com-Vlan-interface10] isis timer csnp 15 level-2 4.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands 4.1.26 isis timer holding-multiplier Syntax isis timer holding-multiplier value [ level-1 | level-2 ] undo isis timer holding-multiplier [ level-1 | level-2 ] View Interface view Parameter value: Number of invalid Hello packets of an IS-IS neighbor, in the range of 3 to 1,000. level-1: Specifies the number of invalid Hello packets of a Level-1 IS-IS neighbor.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands [3Com] interface Vlan-interface 10 [3Com-Vlan-interface10] isis timer holding-multiplier 5 4.1.27 isis timer lsp Syntax isis timer lsp time undo isis timer lsp View Interface view Parameter time: Minimum time interval in millisecond for sending link-state packets, ranging from 1 to 1000, with the default as 33 milliseconds.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands Description Use the isis timer retransmit command to configure the time interval for retransmitting LSP packets over point-to-point link. Use the undo isis timer retransmit command to resume the default configuration. You should be careful when configuring this parameter to avoid unnecessary retransmission.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands It is recommended to configure system level when you configure IS-IS. You can configure all the routers as either Level-1 or Level-2 if there is only one area, because there is no need for all routers to maintain two identical databases at the same time. You are advised to configure all routers as Level-2 in IP network so as to facilitate extending later.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands 4.1.31 md5-compatible Syntax md5-compatible undo md5-compatible View IS-IS view Parameter None Description Use the md5-compatible command to specify IS-IS to adopt the MD5 algorithm compatible with other manufacturers. Use the undo md5-compatible command to specify IS-IS to adopt the default MD5 algorithm. By default, IS-IS adopt the MD5 algorithm compatible with 3Com.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands Parameter network-entity-title: Network entity title in the form of X…X.XXXX....XXXX.00, with the 12 “X” in the middle as system ID of the router, the last “00” as the SEL and the "X…X" in the front as the area address. Description Use the network-entity command to configure the network entity title (NET) for an IS-IS routing process. Use the undo network-entity command to delete a NET.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands clns: IS-IS routing preference based on OSI protocol stack, in the range of 1 to 1,255. It is IP-based preference by default. ip: IS-IS routing preference based on IP protocol stack, in the range of 1 to 255. Description Use the preference command to configure IS-IS protocol preference. Use the undo preference command to resume the default IS-IS protocol preference.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands <3Com> reset isis all 4.1.35 reset isis peer Syntax reset isis peer system-id View User view Parameter system-id: System ID for an IS-IS peer, in the range of one bit to 128 bits. Description Use the reset isis peer command to clear the data information of a specific IS-IS peer. The IS-IS peer is not cleared by default. This command is used when you need to re-establish a specific peer.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands When the overload flag is set for a router, the routes calculated by the router will be ignored by other routes when they calculate SPF. (But the routes directly connected to the router will not be ignored.) When a router is set overload flag, other routers will not transmit the packets that should be forwarded by the router. Example # Set overload flag on the current router.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands 4.1.38 spf-delay-interval Syntax spf-delay-interval number undo spf-delay-interval View IS-IS view Parameter number: Interval of releasing CPU during routing calculation, in the range of 1,000 routes to 50,000 routes. It is 5,000 routes by default. Description Use the spf-delay-interval command to set the interval of releasing CPU during SPF calculation.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands View IS-IS view Parameter seconds: Duration time in milliseconds during SPF calculation, ranging from 150 to 50,000. A calculation is ended when the duration time is reached or exceeded. If the second argument is set to 0, then the SPF calculation will continue until it finishes. It is 0 by default.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands level-1-2: Specifies to summarize all the routes imported to level-1 area and backbone area. level-2: Specifies to summarize only the routes imported to backbone area. If none of the level-1 keyword, level-2 keyword, and level-1-2 keyword is specified, the routes imported to backbone area are summarized. Description Use the summary command to configure IS-IS to generate summarized routes.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands When the router generates system LSPs, the LSPs are generated with the maximum valid time in them. When a LSP is received by other routers, the maximum valid time will be smaller and smaller. If the maximum valid time decreases to 0, this LSP will be removed from LSDB. Related command: timer lsp-refresh.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 4 Integrated IS-IS Configuration Commands 4.1.43 timer spf Syntax timer spf seconds [ level-1 | level-2 ] undo timer spf [ level-1 | level-2 ] View IS-IS view Parameter seconds: Maximum time interval (in seconds) for SPF calculation, ranging from 1 to 120, with the default as 10. level-1: Specifies to set the time interval for only Level-1 SPF calculation.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Note: Routers in this manual refer to common routers or Ethernet switches that run routing protocols, unless otherwise specified. 5.1 BGP Configuration Commands Note: For the commands defining routing policies in BGP, refer to the next chapter “IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands". 5.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands origin-policy route-policy-name: Selects the original routes used for aggregation. attribute-policy route-policy-name: Sets the attributes of the aggregated route. The length of route-policy-name parameter ranges from 1 to 16 character string. Description Use the aggregate command to establish an aggregated record in the BGP routing table. Use the undo aggregate command to disable the function.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands 5.1.2 bgp Syntax bgp as-number undo bgp [ as-number ] View System view Parameter as-number: Specified local AS number, in the range of 1 to 65535. Description Use the bgp command to enable BGP and enter the BGP view. Use the undo bgp command to disable BGP. By default, the BGP is disabled. This command is used to enable/disable BGP and specify the local AS number of BGP. Example # Enable BGP.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Use the undo balance command to cancel the load balance configuration. Example # Configure BGP load balance. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] bgp 100 [3Com-bgp] balance 2 5.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands 5.1.5 confederation id Syntax confederation id as-number undo confederation id View BGP view Parameter as-number: The ID of BGP AS confederation. It is equal to the AS number which contains the AS numbers of multiple sub-ASs. The range is 1 to 65535. Description Use the confederation id command to configure confederation identifier.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands [3Com-bgp] peer 10.1.1.1 group Confed 38 [3Com-bgp] group Remote98 external [3Com-bgp] peer Remote98 as-number 98 [3Com-bgp] peer 200.1.1.1 group Remote98 5.1.6 confederation nonstandard Syntax confederation { nonstandard | standard1965 | standard3065 } undo confederation { nonstandard | standard1965 | standard3065 } View BGP view.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands undo confederation peer-as [ as-number-list ] View BGP view Parameter as-number-list: List of sub-AS numbers. A maximum of 32 sub-ASs can be configured for a confederation in the command. Description Use the confederation peer-as command to configure a confederation consisting of which Sub-ASs. Use the undo confederation peer-as command to delete the specified Sub-AS in the confederation.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands half-life-unreachable: Semi-dampening of an unreachable, in the range of 1 to 45 minutes. The default value is 15 minutes. reuse: Threshold for disabling route suppression. When the penalty value is below this threshold, the route will be reused. The range is 1 to 20000. The default value is 750. suppress: Threshold for enabling route suppression.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Parameter value: Default local preference to be configured. The range is 0 to 4294967295. By default, its value is 100. Description Use the default local-preference command to configure the default local preference. Use the undo default local-preference command to restore the default value. Configuring different local preferences will affect BGP routing selection.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Example # Set the MED value to “25”.. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com-bgp] default med 25 5.1.11 display bgp group Syntax display bgp [ multicast ] group [ group-name ] View Any view Parameter multicast: Specifies multicast address family. group-name: Name of a peer group, a string of 1 to 47 alphanumeric characters.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Table 5-2 Description on fields of the display bgp group command Field Description Group Name of peer group type Type of peer group: IBGP or EBGP as-number AS number of peer group members in this group Members in this peer group route-policy Name of configured route policy filter-policy Configured export and import route filter for BGP acl Configured access control list ip-prefix Config
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Table 5-3 Description on fields of the display bgp network command Field Description Network Network address Mask Mask Route-policy Configured route policy 5.1.13 display bgp paths Syntax display bgp paths as-regular-expression View Any view Parameter as-regular-expression: Matched AS path regular expression.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Field Description EGP The route is learned from exterior gateway protocol (EGP). INC Short for INCOMPLETE: indicates that the original source of the route information is unknown (learned by other methods). BGP sets the origin of the route imported through other IGP protocols as INCOMPLETE AS-path attribute of route, which records all AS areas that the route passes.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands no export policy ip-prefix no export policy filter-policy no export policy acl no import policy route-policy no import policy ip-prefix no import policy filter-policy no import policy acl no default route produce Table 5-5 Description on fields of the display bgp peer command Field Description Peer IP address of peer and port number used by the peer to establish TCP connection Local IP address and
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Description Use the display bgp routing-table command to display all the BGP routing information. Example # Display all the BGP routing information.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Field Description Origin attribute of a route, which indicates that the route updates its origin relative to the route originating it from the AS. It has three optional values: IGP The route is inside the AS. BGP treats the aggregation route and the route defined by the network command inside AS, and the origin type as IGP. EGP The route is learned from exterior gateway protocol (EGP).
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands #^ 1.1.3.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200 #^ 2.2.3.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200 #^ 4.4.4.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200 #^ 9.9.9.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200 #^ 10.10.10.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200 #^ 22.1.0.0/16 200.1.7.2 100 INC 200 # 88.1.0.0/16 60 0.0.0.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Description Use the display bgp routing-table cidr command to view the routing information about the non-natural mask (namely the classless inter-domain routing, CIDR).
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Description Use the display bgp routing-table community command to view the routing information related to the specified BGP community number in the routing table. Example # Display the routing information matching BGP community number 11:22.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Destination/Mask Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Next-hop Med Local-Pref Origin As-Path ------------------------------------------------------------------1.1.1.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200 1.1.2.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200 1.1.3.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 IGP 200 2.2.3.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200 4.4.4.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200 9.9.9.0/24 10.10.10.1 0 INC 200 10.10.10.0/24 10.10.10.2 0 IGP 10.10.10.0/24 10.10.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Table 5-8 Description on the fields of the display bgp routing-table dampened command Field Description Status code: # – valid (valid route) ^ – active (optimal route selected) Flags I – internal (IBGP route) D – damped H – history S – aggregate suppressed B – balance (load balance) #D Valid and dampened route Dest/Mask The route to this network segment is dampened.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Description Use the display bgp routing-table different-origin-as command to display routes that have different source autonomous systems. Example # Display the routes that have different source ASs.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands <3Com> display bgp routing-table flap-info Flags: # - valid ^ - active I - internal D - damped H - history S - aggregate suppressed Dest/Mask Source Keepup-time Damping-limit Flap-times Origin As-path -------------------------------------------------------------------#D 11.1.0.0/16 133.1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands 5.1.23 display bgp routing-table peer Syntax display bgp [ multicast ] routing-table peer ip-address { advertised | received } [ network-address [ mask ] | statistic ] View Any view Parameter multicast: Specifies multicast address family. ip -address: Specifies the peer to be displayed. advertised: Routing information advertised by the specified peer.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Parameter multicast: Specifies multicast address family. as-regular-expression: Matched AS regular expression. Description Use the display bgp routing-table regular-expression command to view the routing information matching the specified AS regular expression Example # Display the routing information matched with ^200$.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Example # Display the statistics of BGP routing information. <3Com> display bgp routing-table statistic Routes total: 4 5.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands [3Com-bgp] filter-policy 2000 export 5.1.27 filter-policy import Syntax filter-policy gateway ip-prefix-name import undo filter-policy gateway ip-prefix-name import filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } import undo filter-policy { acl-number | ip-prefix ip-prefix-name } import View BGP view Parameter acl-number: Number of IP access control list, in the range of 2000 to 3999.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands undo group group-name View BGP view Parameter group-name: Name of the peer group, an alphanumeric string of 1 to 47 characters. It means only locally. internal: Creates an IBGP peer group. external: Creates an EBGP peer group, including other sub-ASs in the confederation. Description Use the group group-name command to configure a peer group.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Parameter protocol: Source routing protocols which can be imported, including direct, ospf, ospf-ase, ospf-nssa, rip, isis and static at present. process-id: Specific process ID, in the range of 1 to 65535. This argument is valid only when the protocol argument is “ospf”. med-value: MED value of an imported route, in the range of 0 to 4294967295.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Description Use the network command to advertise the network segment route to the BGP routing table. Use the undo network command to cancel the existing configuration. By default, the BGP does not advertise any network segment routes. Example # Advertise routes to the network segment 10.0.0.0/16. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] bgp 100 [3Com-bgp] network 10.0.0.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands 5.1.32 peer allow-as-loop Syntax peer { group-name | ip-address } allow-as-loop [ number ] undo peer { group-name | ip-address } allow-as-loop View BGP view Parameter group-name: Name of a peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters. ip-address: IP address of the peer. number: Times of repeating the local AS number, in the range of 1 to 10.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Description Use the peer as-number command to configure the AS number of a peer group. Use the undo peer as-number command to delete the AS number of a peer group. By default, no AS number is configured for a peer group. Example # Set the AS number for the peer named test to 100. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] bgp 100 [3Com-bgp] peer test as-number 100 5.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] bgp 100 [3Com-bgp] peer test as-path-acl 1 export 5.1.35 peer as-path-acl import Syntax peer { group-name | ip-address } as-path-acl acl-number import undo peer { group-name | ip-address } as-path-acl acl-number import View BGP view Parameter group-name: Name of the peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands View BGP view Parameter group-name: Name of the peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters. ip-address: IP address of the peer. interface-type interface-num: Interface type and interface number. Description Use the peer connect-interface command to specify the source interface of a route update packet. Use the undo peer connect-interface command to restore the best source interface.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Description Use the peer default-route-advertise command to send the default route to the peer/peer group. Use the undo peer default-route-advertise command to cancel the existing configuration. By default, the default route is not sent to the peer group. For this command, no default route needs to exist in the routing table.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Related command: display current-configuration, display bgp peer, and display bgp routing-table group. Example # Configure the description information of an existing peer group named group1 as ISP1. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] bgp 100 [3Com-bgp] peer group1 description ISP1 5.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands 5.1.40 peer enable Syntax peer { group-name | ip-address } enable undo peer { group-name | ip-address } enable View BGP view Parameter group-name: Name of the peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters. ip-address: IP address of the peer. Description Use the peer enable command to enable the specified peer/peer group. Use the undo peer enable command to disable the specified peer/peer group.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands acl-number: Basic or advanced ACL number, ranging from 2000 to 3999. export: Applies a filtering policy on advertised routes. It applies to a peer group only. Description Use the peer filter-policy export command to configure the filter-policy list of routes advertised by a peer group. Use the undo peer filter-policy export command to cancel the existing configuration.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands By default, a peer/peer group has no access control list (acl). Related command: peer filter-policy export, ip as-path-acl, peer as-path-acl export and peer as-path-acl import. Example # Set the filter-policy list of a peer group test. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] bgp 100 [3Com-bgp] peer test filter-policy 2000 import 5.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands 5.1.44 peer ip-prefix export Syntax peer group-name ip-prefix ip-prefix-name export undo peer group-name ip-prefix ip-prefix-name export View BGP view Parameter group-name: Name of peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters. ip-prefix-name: Name of the specified ip-prefix, containing 1 to 19 characters.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands ip-prefix-name: Name of the specified ip-prefix, containing 1 to 19 characters. Description Use the peer ip-prefix import command to configure the route filtering policy of routes received by the peer/peer group based on the ip-prefix. Use the undo peer ip-prefix import command to cancel the route filtering policy of the peer/peer group based on the ip-prefix.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands 5.1.47 peer password Syntax peer { group-name | ip-address } password { cipher | simple } password undo peer { group-name | ip-address } password View BGP view Parameter group-name: Name of the peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters. ip-address: IP address of the peer. cipher: Displays the configured password in cipher text mode. simple: Displays the configured password in simple text mode.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands # Perform the similar configuration on the peer. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] bgp 100 [3Com-bgp] peer 10.1.100.1 password simple 3Com 5.1.48 peer public-as-only Syntax peer group-name public-as-only undo peer group-name public-as-only View BGP view Parameter group-name: Name of a peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands undo peer group-name reflect-client View BGP view Parameter group-name: Name of peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters. Description Use the peer reflect-client command to configure the local device as a route reflector and configure a peer/peer group as the route reflector client. Use the undo peer reflect-client command to cancel the existing configuration.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Use the undo peer route-policy export command to delete the specified Route-policy. By default, the peer/peer group has no Route-policy association. Related command: peer route-policy import. Example # Apply the Route-policy named test-policy to the route advertised from the peer group named test. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Example # Apply the Route-policy named test-policy to the route coming from the peer/peer group test. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] bgp 100 [3Com-bgp] peer test route-policy test-policy import 5.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands 5.1.53 peer timer Syntax peer { group-name | ip-address } timer keep-alive keepalive-interval hold holdtime-interval undo peer { group-name | ip-address } timer View BGP view Parameter group-name: Name of peer group, containing 1 to 47 characters. ip-address: IP address of the peer. Keepalive-interval: Keepalive timer in seconds. It is in the range of 1 to 65535 and defaults to 60 seconds.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Parameter ebgp-value: Preference value for EBGP. It is in the range of 1 to 256 and defaults to 256. ibgp-value: Preference value for IBGP routes. It is in the range of 1 to 256 and defaults to 256. local-value: Preference value for locally-originated routes. It is in the range of 1 to 256 and defaults to 130. Description Use the preference command to set preference values for.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Related command: reflector cluster-id, and peer reflect-client. Example # Disable the reflection between clients. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] bgp 100 [3Com-bgp] undo reflect between-clients 5.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands 5.1.57 refresh bgp Syntax refresh bgp { all | ip-address | group group-name } [ multicast ] { import | export } View User view Parameter all: Refreshes all peers. ip-address: Refreshes connection with a specified BGP peer. group-name: Peer group name, containing 1 to 47 characters. multicast: Specifies multicast address family.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands ip-address: Resets connection with a specified BGP peer. group group-name: Resets the connection with a specified peer group. Description Use the reset bgp ip-address command to reset the connection of BGP with a specified BGP peer. Use the reset bgp all command to reset all the connections with BGP. Use the reset bgp group group-name command to reset the BGP connection with a specified peer group.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands 5.1.60 reset bgp flap-info Syntax reset bgp flap-info [ regular-expression as-regular-expression | as-path-acl acl-number | ip-address [ mask ] ] View User view Parameter regular-expression as-regular-expression: Reset the flap-info matching the AS path regular expression. as-path-acl acl-number: Resets the flap-info in consistency with a specified filter list.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Related command: peer group. Example # Reset BGP connections of all members from group1. <3Com> reset bgp group group1 5.1.62 summary Syntax summary undo summary View BGP view Parameter None Description Use the summary command to configure auto aggregation of sub-network routes. Use the undo summary command to disable it. By default, no auto aggregation of sub-network routes is executed.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Parameter keepalive-interval: Set the interval time value for keepalive time. The range is 1 to 65535. By default, its value is 60 seconds. holdtime-interval: Set the interval time value for hold time. The range is 3 to 65535. By default, its value is 180 seconds. Description Use the timer command to configure the Keep-alive and Hold-time timer of BGP.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 5 BGP Configuration Commands Example # Cancel the synchronization of BGP and IGP. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 6 IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands Chapter 6 IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands Note: The word “router” covered in the following text represent routers in common sense and Ethernet switches running a routing protocol. To improve readability, this will not be mentioned again in this manual. 6.1 IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands 6.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 6 IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands Example # Add AS number 200 before the original AS path <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com]route-policy 10 permit node 10 [3Com-route-policy] apply as-path 200 6.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 6 IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands Example #Create a Route-policy named setcommunity and set its node sequence number as 16 and matching mode as permit. Enter route policy view and set matching conditions and execute attribute change command <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 6 IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands 6.1.4 apply cost-type Syntax apply cost-type [ internal | external ] undo apply cost-type View Route policy view Parameter internal: Used in BGP, indicates that the IGP cost will be used as the BGP MED value when BGP peer entity advertises routes to the EBGP peer entity.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 6 IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands Description Use the apply ip next-hop command to set the IP address of next hop. Use the undo apply ip next-hop command to cancel the setting argument. By default, no next hop is defined. An apply statement of Route-policy sets the next hop of the filtered packets.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 6 IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands Example # Define an apply clause to import routes to level-2 area. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com]route-policy 10 permit node 10 [3Com-route-policy] apply isis level-2 6.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 6 IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands View Route policy view Parameter igp: Specifies that BGP routing information source is internal route egp: Specifies that BGP routing information source is external route as-number: Specifies autonomous system number of external routes. The value ranges from 1 to 65535. incomplete: Specifies that BGP routing information source is unknown.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 6 IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands Related command: if-match interface, if-match acl, if-match ip-prefix, if-match ip next-hop, if-match cost, if-match tag, route-policy, apply ip next-hop, apply local-preference, apply cost, and apply origin. Example # Define an apply statement. When it is used for setting route information attribute, it sets the tag area of route information as 100.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 6 IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands Field Description ip-prefix / mask Address and network segment length of ip-prefix GE Greater-equal value of ip-prefix network segment length LE Less-equal value of ip-prefix network segment length 6.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 6 IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands Field Description if-match (prefixlist) p1 if-match statement configured apply cost 100 Apply routing cost 100 to the routes matching the conditions defined by if-match statement matched Number of routes matching the conditions set by if-match statement denied Number of routes not matching the conditions set by if-match statement 6.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 6 IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] route-policy policy_10 permit node 12 %New sequence of this list [3Com-route-policy] if-match ip-prefix p1 6.1.13 if-match as-path Syntax if-match as-path as-path-number undo if-match as-path View Route policy view Parameter as-path-number: AS path number, ranging from 1 to 199.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 6 IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands View Route policy view Parameter basic-community-list-number: Basic community list number, ranging from 1 to 99. adv-community-list-number: Advanced community list number, ranging from 100 to 199. whole-match: Exact match, which means that all communities and only these communities must be displayed.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 6 IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands Parameter value: Route cost value, ranging from 0 to 4,294,967,295. Description Use the if-match cost command to configure one of the match rules of the route-policy to match the cost of routing information. Use the undo if-match cost command to cancel the configuration of the match rule. By default, no if-match statement is defined.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 6 IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands Use the undo if-match interface command to cancel the setting of matching condition. By default, no if-match statement is defined. As an if-match statement of route-policy, it matches the corresponding interface of route next hop when filtering route.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 6 IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands An if-match statement of route-policy is used to specify the next hop matching the routing information when filtering the routes. It performs filter by referencing an ACL or an address prefix list.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 6 IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands [3Com] route-policy policy permit node 1 %New sequence of this list [3Com-route-policy] if-match tag 8 6.1.19 ip as-path-acl Syntax ip as-path-acl acl-number { permit | deny } as-regular-expression undo ip as-path-acl acl-number View System view Parameter acl-number: AS path list number, ranging from 1 to 199.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 6 IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands Parameter basic-comm-list-number: Basic community list number, ranging from 1 to 99. adv-comm-list-number: Advanced community list number, ranging from 100 to 199. permit: Specifies to allow access to matching conditions. deny: Specifies to deny access to matching conditions. aa:nn: Community number. The value ranges of aa and nn are both from 1 to 65535.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 6 IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands Parameter ip-prefix-name: Name of address prefix list, containing 1 to 19 characters. It identifies an address prefix list uniquely. index-number: Identifier of an item in the prefix address list. The item with a smaller index-number will be tested first. permit: Specifies the match mode of the defined address prefix list items as permit mode.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 6 IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands Example # Define an ip-prefix named p1 to permit only the routes whose mask lengths are 17 or 18 on network segment 10.0.192.0 8 to pass. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] ip ip-prefix p1 permit 10.0.192.0 8 greater-equal 17 less-equal 18 6.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 6 IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands An if-match statement defines the match rules of this node. An apply statement defines the actions after filtering through this node. The filtering relationship between the if-match statements of the node is "and". That is, all if-match statements of the node must be met. The filtering relation between Route-policy nodes is "OR".
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 7 Route Capacity Configuration Commands Chapter 7 Route Capacity Configuration Commands Note: The word “router” covered in the following text represent routers in common sense and Ethernet switches running a routing protocol. To improve readability, this will not be mentioned again in this manual. 7.1 Route Capacity Configuration Commands 7.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 7 Route Capacity Configuration Commands Table 7-1 Description on the fields of the display memory command Field Description System Total Memory(bytes) Free memory size, in bytes, of the switch Total Used Memory(bytes) Occupied memory size, in bytes, of the switch Used Rate Memory occupation rate 7.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 7 Route Capacity Configuration Commands The information displayed by this command includes Ethernet switch memory limit, size of free memory, times of disconnection, times of reconnection, and the current state. The following table describes the fields of the command: Table 7-2 Description on the fields of the display memory limit command Field Description system memory safety Safety value of the switch memory.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 7 Route Capacity Configuration Commands After this command is used, connections of all the routing protocols will not recover when the free memory of the switch recovers to a safety value. In this case, you need to restart the routing protocol to recover the connections. Use this command with caution. Related command: memory auto-establish enable, memory { safety | limit }, display memory limit.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 7 Route Capacity Configuration Commands <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] memory auto-establish enable 7.1.5 memory { safety | limit }* Syntax memory { safety safety-value | limit limit-value }* undo memory [ safety | limit ] View System view Parameter safety-value: Safety free memory of the switch , in Mbytes. Its value range depends on the free memory of the current switch.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Routing Protocol Chapter 7 Route Capacity Configuration Commands Example # Set the lower limit of the switch free memory to 2 MB and the safety value to 4 MB. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands............................................................... 1-1 1.1 IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands ....................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 display igmp-snooping configuration....................................................................... 1-1 1.1.2 display igmp-snooping group ................................
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Table of Contents Chapter 4 IGMP Configuration Commands ................................................................................ 4-1 4.1 IGMP Configuration Commands........................................................................................ 4-1 4.1.1 display igmp group .................................................................................................. 4-1 4.1.2 display igmp interface ............................
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Table of Contents 5.1.22 static-rp................................................................................................................
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 1 IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands Chapter 1 IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands Note: Ethernet switches serve as routers when an IP multicast protocol is running on them. The routers mentioned here refer to common routers and Layer 3 Ethernet switches where the IP multicast protocol is running. 1.1 IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 1 IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands The max response timeout is 1 second(s). The host port timeout is 260 second(s). The above information shows: IGMP Snooping is enabled, the aging time of the router port is 105 seconds, the query response timeout time is one second, and the aging time of multicast member ports is 260 seconds. 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 1 IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands The information above means: z Multicast groups exist in VLAN 2. z The address of the IP multicast group is 255.1.1.1. 1.1.3 display igmp-snooping statistics Syntax display igmp-snooping statistics View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display igmp-snooping statistics command to display IGMP Snooping message statistics.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast z zero IGMP leave packets z zero IGMP error packets Chapter 1 IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands IGMP Snooping sends: z zero IGMP specific query packets 1.1.4 display multicast-vlan Syntax display multicast-vlan [ vlan-id ] View Any view Parameter vlan-id: ID of the specified VLAN. Description Use the display multicast-vlan command to display the configuration of the multicast VLAN.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 1 IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands Parameter enable: Enables the IGMP Snooping feature. disable: Disables the IGMP Snooping feature. Description Use the igmp-snooping enable command to enable the IGMP Snooping feature. Use the igmp-snooping disable command to disable the IGMP Snooping feature. By default, the IGMP Snooping feature is disabled. Example # Enable the IGMP Snooping feature on the switch.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 1 IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands If this command is executed, when receiving an IGMP Leave packet, IGMP Snooping removes the port from the multicast group directly. When the port has only one user, enabling IGMP fast leave processing can save bandwidth. Note: z This feature is effective for IGMP-V2-enabled clients.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 1 IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands Description Use the igmp-snooping group-limit command to define the maximum number of multicast groups the port can join. Use the undo igmp-snooping group-limit command to restore the default setting. By default, there is no limit on the number of multicast groups the port can join. Example # Allow the GigabitEthernet1/0/1 port to join at most 200 multicast groups.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 1 IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands filtering ACL configured on the access port to determine if the port can join the corresponding multicast group or not. If yes, it adds the port to the forward port list of the multicast group. If not, it drops the IGMP host report message and does not forward the corresponding data stream to the port. In this way, you can control the multicast streams that users can access.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 1 IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands [3Com-Ethernet1/0/1] igmp-snooping group-policy 2000 vlan 2 [3Com-Ethernet1/0/1] quit # Configure ACL 2001 to allow users under Ethernet 1/0/2 to access the multicast streams in any groups except groups 225.0.0.0 to 225.0.0.255. z Configure ACL 2001. [3Com] acl number 2001 [3Com-acl-basic-2001] rule deny source 225.0.0.0 0.0.0.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 1 IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands Example # Set the aging time of multicast member ports to 300 seconds. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] igmp-snooping host-aging-time 300 1.1.10 igmp-snooping max-response-time Syntax igmp-snooping max-response-time seconds undo igmp-snooping max-response-time View System view Parameter seconds: Query response timeout time, in the range of 1 to 25 in seconds.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 1 IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands View System view Parameter None Description Use the igmp-snooping report-aggregation command to enable suppression on Layer 2 multicast IGMP report packets. In the IGMP-snooping-enabled VLAN, only one IGMP report packet is sent to the upstream router port in an interval. Use the undo igmp-snooping report-aggregation command to disable suppression on Layer 2 multicast IGMP report packets.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 1 IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands Description Use the igmp-snooping router-aging-time command to configure the aging time of the router port. Use the undo igmp-snooping router-aging-time command to restore the default aging time. By default, the aging time of the router port is 105 seconds. The router port here refers to the port connecting the Layer 2 switch to the router.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 1 IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands Caution: z A multicast VLAN cannot be configured as a multicast sub-VLAN. z A multicast sub-VLAN cannot be configured as a multicast VLAN. z A multicast sub-VLAN cannot be configured as the sub-VLAN of other multicast VLANs. z One multicast sub-VLAN is corresponding to only one multicast VLAN.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 1 IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands By default, no sub-VLAN is configured for a multicast VLAN. Caution: z A multicast VLAN cannot be configured as a multicast sub-VLAN. z A multicast sub-VLAN cannot be configured as a multicast VLAN. z A multicast sub-VLAN cannot be configured as the sub-VLAN of other multicast VLANs. z One multicast sub-VLAN is corresponding to only one multicast VLAN.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 1 IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands Example # Clear IGMP Snooping statistics.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 2 Common IP Multicast Configuration Commands Chapter 2 Common IP Multicast Configuration Commands 2.1 Common IP Multicast Configuration Commands 2.1.1 display mpm forwarding-table Syntax display mpm forwarding-table [ group-address | source-address ] View Any view Parameter group-address: Multicast group address to specify a multicast group, in the range of 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 2 Common IP Multicast Configuration Commands GigabitEthernet3/0/19 Total 1 entry(entries) Listed Multicast Forwarding Cache Table Total 1 entry(entries) 00001. (10.11.113.110, 226.1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 2 Common IP Multicast Configuration Commands View Any view Parameter vlan vlan-id: Displays the VLAN where the multicast group information lies. If this keyword is not specified, the command displays the multicast group information in all VLANs. ip-address: IP address of the multicast group to be displayed.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 2 Common IP Multicast Configuration Commands Total 2 IP Group(s). Total 2 MAC Group(s). Vlan(id):1200. Total 2 IP Group(s). Total 2 MAC Group(s). Static router port(s): Dynamic router port(s): IP group(s):the following ip group(s) match to one mac group. IP group address:228.0.0.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 2 Common IP Multicast Configuration Commands 2.1.3 display multicast forwarding-table Syntax display multicast forwarding-table [ group-address [ mask { group-mask | mask-length } ] | source-address [ mask { group-mask | mask-length } ] | incoming-interface { interface-type interface-number ] register } ]* View Any view Parameter group-address: Address of the specified multicast group, in the range of 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 2 Common IP Multicast Configuration Commands Field Description Total 1 entries Total number of entries 00001 Serial number of an entry (10.0.0.4, 225.1.1.1) (s,g) iif Vlan-interface2, 0 oifs The incoming interface of the multicast forwarding table is Vlan-interface 2, and the multicast forwarding table does not have an outgoing interface.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 2 Common IP Multicast Configuration Commands Example # Query the information about the routing entries corresponding to the multicast group 225.1.1.1.1 in the multicast routing table. <3Com> display multicast routing-table Multicast Routing Table Total 3 entries (4.4.4.4, 224.2.149.17) Uptime: 00:15:16, Timeout in 272 sec Upstream interface: Vlan-interface1(4.4.4.6) Downstream interface list: Vlan-interface2(2.2.2.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 2 Common IP Multicast Configuration Commands Table 2-4 Description on the fields of the display multicast routing-table command Field Description Multicast Routing Table Multicast routing table Total 3 entries There are 3 entries in all in the multicast routing table. (4.4.4.4, 224.2.149.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 2 Common IP Multicast Configuration Commands If you specify both the port type and the port number, the multicast source port z check information about the specified port is displayed. Example # Display the multicast source port suppression state of Ethernet 1/0/1. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 2 Common IP Multicast Configuration Commands System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] multicast load-sharing enable 2.1.7 multicast route-limit Syntax multicast route-limit limit undo multicast route-limit View System view Parameter limit: Limit on the capacity of the multicast routing table, in the range of 0 to 1,024. Description Use the multicast route-limit command to limit the capacity of the multicast routing table.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 2 Common IP Multicast Configuration Commands View System view Parameter None Description Use the multicast routing-enable command to enable the IP multicast routing feature. Use the undo multicast routing-enable command to disable the IP multicast routing feature. The IP multicast routing feature is disabled by default. Example # Enable the IP multicast routing feature. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 2 Common IP Multicast Configuration Commands Caution: z Up to 256 static router ports can be configured in a system. z Reflection ports cannot be configured as static router ports. z A port in a multicast sub-VLAN cannot be configured as a static router port. Example # Configure Ethernet1/0/1 in VLAN 2 as a static router port. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 2 Common IP Multicast Configuration Commands Caution: z Up to 256 static router ports can be configured in a system. z Reflection ports cannot be configured as static router ports. z A port in a multicast sub-VLAN cannot be configured as a static router port. Example # Configure Ethernet1/0/1 in VLAN 2 as a static router port. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 2 Common IP Multicast Configuration Commands When the switch receives a multicast packet, the switch will search the multicast forwarding entry according to the source address and destination address of the packet. If the matching forwarding entry is found and the packet is received on the right ingress of the forwarding entry, the packet will be forwarded according to the forwarding entry.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 2 Common IP Multicast Configuration Commands Description Use the multicast-source-deny enable command to enable the multicast source port suppression feature. Use the undo multicast-source-deny enable command to restore the default setting. By default, the multicast source port suppression feature is disabled on all the ports.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 2 Common IP Multicast Configuration Commands group-address: Specifies the group address. group-mask: Specifies the mask of the group address. group-mask-length: Specifies the mask length of the group address. source-address: Specifies the source address. source-mask: Specifies the mask of the source address. source-mask-length: Specifies the mask length of the source address.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 2 Common IP Multicast Configuration Commands group-mask: Specifies the mask of the group address. group-mask-length: Specifies the mask length of the group address. source-address: Specifies the source address. source-mask: Specifies the mask of the source address. source-mask-length: Specifies the mask length of the source address. incoming-interface: Specifies the incoming interface of the routing entry.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 3 Multicast MAC Address Entry Configuration Commands Chapter 3 Multicast MAC Address Entry Configuration Commands 3.1 Multicast MAC Address Entry Configuration Commands 3.1.1 display mac-address multicast Syntax display mac-address multicast [ count ] View Any view Parameter count: Number of MAC entries.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 3 Multicast MAC Address Entry Configuration Commands vlan-id: VLAN ID. interface-list: Forwarding port list, in the format of { { interface-type interface-num } [ to { interface-type interface-num } ] }&<1-10>.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 4 IGMP Configuration Commands Chapter 4 IGMP Configuration Commands Note: When running IP multicast protocols, Ethernet switches also provide the functions of switches. We use routers in this manual to stand for not only the common routers but also the layer 3 Ethernet switches running IP multicast protocols. 4.1 IGMP Configuration Commands 4.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Group Address Chapter 4 IGMP Configuration Commands Last Reporter Uptime Expires 225.1.1.1 20.20.20.20 00:02:04 00:01:15 225.1.1.3 20.20.20.20 00:02:04 00:01:15 225.1.1.2 20.20.20.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 4 IGMP Configuration Commands Value of maximum query response time for IGMP(in seconds): 10 Value of robust count for IGMP: 2 Value of startup query interval for IGMP(in seconds): 15 Value of last member query interval for IGMP(in seconds): 1 Value of query timeout for IGMP version 1(in seconds): 400 Policy to accept IGMP reports: none Querier for IGMP: 10.153.17.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 4 IGMP Configuration Commands undo igmp enable View VLAN interface view Parameter None Description Use igmp enable command to enable IGMP on an interface. Use the undo igmp enable command to disable IGMP on the interface. By default, IGMP is disabled on a VALN interface. . These commands do not take effect until the multicast routing feature is enabled. After this configuration, start to configure other IGMP features.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 4 IGMP Configuration Commands By default, 256 IGMP groups are added to a VLAN interface. The new configuration overwrites the old one if you run the command for a second time. Caution: z New groups cannot be added when the number of IGMP multicast groups has exceeded the configured limit.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 4 IGMP Configuration Commands Description Use the igmp group-policy command to set the filter of multicast groups on the VLAN interface to control the access to IP multicast groups. Use undo igmp group-policy command to remove the filter configured. By default, no filter is configured, that is, a host can join any multicast group.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 4 IGMP Configuration Commands vlan-id: Specifies the ID for the VLAN to which the port belongs. Description Use the igmp group-policy vlan command to set the filter of multicast groups on a port to control the access to the IP multicast groups. Use the undo igmp group-policy vlan command to remove the configured filter. By default, no filter is configured, that is, a host can join any multicast group.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 4 IGMP Configuration Commands number. For the meanings and ranges of the two arguments, refer to the parameter descriptions in part “Port Basic Configuration” in this manual. Description Use the igmp host-join port command to enable a port in the VLAN interface of a switch to join a multicast group. Use undo igmp host-join port command to disable the configuration.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 4 IGMP Configuration Commands System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] interface Vlan-interface 10 [3Com-Vlan-interface10] igmp enable [3Com-Vlan-interface10] quit [3Com] interface Ethernet 0/1 [3Com-Ethernet0/1] port access vlan 10 [3Com-Ethernet0/1] igmp host-join 225.0.0.1 vlan 10 4.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 4 IGMP Configuration Commands robust-value × seconds), the IGMP query router continue to maintain the membership of this group. When receiving no IGMP Membership Report message from any hosts within the defined period, the IGMP query router considers it as timeout and stops membership maintenance for the group. This command is only available on the IGMP query router running IGMP v2.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 4 IGMP Configuration Commands <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] interface Vlan-interface 10 [3Com-Vlan-interface10] igmp max-response-time 8 4.1.11 igmp proxy Syntax igmp proxy Vlan-interface interface-number undo igmp proxy View Interface view Parameter interface-number: Proxy interface number.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 4 IGMP Configuration Commands Example # Configure VLAN-interface 2 as the IGMP proxy interface of VLAN-interface 1 on the Layer 3 switch. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] multicast routing-enable [3Com] interface vlan-interface 1 [3Com-Vlan-interface1] igmp enable [3Com- Vlan-interface1] igmp proxy vlan-interface 2 4.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 4 IGMP Configuration Commands <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] multicast routing-enable [3Com] igmp report-aggregation 4.1.13 igmp robust-count Syntax igmp robust-count robust-value undo igmp robust-count View VLAN interface view Parameter robust-value: IGMP robust value, number of sending the IGMP group-specific query packets after the IGMP querier receives the IGMP Leave packet from the host.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 4 IGMP Configuration Commands This command is only available on the IGMP query router running IGMP v2. For the host running IGMP v1, this command cannot take effect because the host does not send IGMP Leave packets when it leaves a group. Related command: igmp lastmember-queryinterval and display igmp interface. Example # Set the robust value of the Vlan-interface 10 to 3. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 4 IGMP Configuration Commands Example # Set the querier to expire after 300 seconds. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] interface Vlan-interface 10 [3Com-Vlan-interface10] igmp timer other-querier-present 300 4.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 4 IGMP Configuration Commands 4.1.16 igmp version Syntax igmp version { 1 | 2 } undo igmp version View VLAN interface view Parameter 1: IGMP Version 1. 2: IGMP Version 2. Description Use the igmp version command to specify the version of IGMP that a router uses. Use the undo igmp version command to restore the default value. The default IGMP version is IGMP version 2. All routers on a subnet must support the same version of IGMP.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 4 IGMP Configuration Commands group-mask: Mask of IGMP group address. Description Use the reset igmp group command to delete an existing IGMP group from the VLAN interface. The deleted group can be added to the VLAN interface again. Example # Delete all IGMP groups on all the VLAN interfaces. <3Com> reset igmp group all # Delete all IGMP groups on Vlan-interface10.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 5 PIM Configuration Commands Chapter 5 PIM Configuration Commands 5.1 PIM Configuration Commands 5.1.1 bsr-policy Syntax bsr-policy acl-number undo bsr-policy View PIM view Parameter acl-number: ACL number imported in BSR filtering policy, in the range of 2,000 to 2,999. Description Use the bsr-policy command to limit the range of legal BSRs to prevent BSR proofing.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 5 PIM Configuration Commands cannot receive or forward BSR messages other than these two. Even legal BSRs cannot contest with them. Problems may still exist if a legal BSR is attacked, though these two measures can effectively guarantee high BSR security. The source parameter in the rule command is translated as BSR address in the bsr-policy command. Related command: acl and rule.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 5 PIM Configuration Commands When configure the candidate BSR, the larger bandwidth should be guaranteed since a great amount of information will be exchanged between BSR and other devices in the PIM domain. Related command: pim sm. Example # Configure the switch as a BSR with priority 2 (and the C-BSR address is designated as the IP address of VLAN-interface10). <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 5 PIM Configuration Commands Example # Configure the switch to advertise the BSR that the switch itself is the C-RP in the PIM. The standard access list 2000 defines the groups related to the RP. The address of C-RP is designated as the IP address of VLAN-interface10. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] multicast routing-enable [3Com] acl number 2000 [3Com-acl-basic-2000] rule permit source 225.0.0.0 0.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 5 PIM Configuration Commands address. For the C-RP messages received, only when their C-RP addresses match the source address and their server group addresses are subset of those in ACL, can the be considered as matched. Related command: acl, and rule. Example # Configure C-RP filtering policy on the C-BSR routers, allowing only 1.1.1.1/32 as C-RP and to serve only for the groups 225.1.0.0/16.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 5 PIM Configuration Commands Table 5-1 Description on the fields of the display pim bsr-info command Field Description BSR Bootstrap router Priority Priority of BSR Mask Length: 30 Length of mask Expires: 00:01:55 Value of the timer 5.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 5 PIM Configuration Commands PIM DR(designated router) is 10.10.1.20 Table 5-2 Description on the fields of the display pim interface command Field Description PIM version Version of PIM PIM mode PIM mode enabled on the VLAN interface (DM or SM) PIM query interval Hello packet interval PIM neighbor limit Limit of the PIM neighbors on the VLAN interface.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 5 PIM Configuration Commands Table 5-3 Description on the fields of the display pim neighbor command Field Description Neighbor’s Address Neighbor address Interface name VLAN interface where the neighbor has been discovered Uptime Time passed since the multicast group has been discovered Expires Specifies when the member will be removed from the group 5.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 5 PIM Configuration Commands Example # Display the information about the PIM multicast routing table. <3Com> display pim routing-table PIM-SM Routing Table Total 0 (*,*,RP)entry, 0 (*,G)entry, 2 (S,G)entries (192.168.1.2, 224.2.178.130), Protocol 0x20: PIMSM, Flag 0x4: SPT UpTime: 23:59, Timeout after 196 seconds Upstream interface: VLAN-interface2, RPF neighbor: NULL Downstream interface list: NULL (192.168.1.2, 224.2.181.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 5 PIM Configuration Commands Description Use the display pim rp-info command to view the RP information of the multicast group. In addition, this command can also display the BSR and static RP information. Example # View the RP information of the multicast group <3Com> display pim rp-info PIM-SM RP-SET information: BSR is: 4.4.4.6 Group/MaskLen: 224.0.0.0/4 RP 4.4.4.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 5 PIM Configuration Commands Parameter None Description Use the pim command to enter PIM view to configure the global PIM parameters. You cannot use the pim command to enable the PIM protocol. Use the undo pim command to exit PIM view to system view and clear the global PIM configuration parameters. Example # Enter PIM view. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 5 PIM Configuration Commands Note that you cannot use this command to set up a multicast boundary. Instead, what you use this command to set up is just a PIM Bootstrap packet boundary. Related command: c-bsr. Example # Configure domain boundary on VLAN-interface10. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 5 PIM Configuration Commands 5.1.13 pim neighbor-limit Syntax pim neighbor-limit limit undo pim neighbor-limit View VLAN interface view Parameter limit: Upper limit of PIM neighbors on the VLAN interface, in the range of 0~128. Description Use the pim neighbor-limit command to limit the number PIM neighbors on a router interface. No neighbor can be added to the router any more when the limit is reached.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 5 PIM Configuration Commands Description Use the pim neighbor-policy command to configure the router to filter the PIM neighbors on the current VLAN interface. Use the undo pim neighbor-policy command to disable the filtering. Only the routers that match the filtering rule in the ACL can serve as a PIM neighbor of the current VLAN interface. The new configuration overwrites the old one if you run the command for a second time.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 5 PIM Configuration Commands Related command: multicast routing-enable. Example # Enable the PIM-SM protocol on VLAN-interface10. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] multicast routing-enable [3Com] interface Vlan-interface 10 [3Com-Vlan-interface10] pim sm 5.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 5 PIM Configuration Commands [3Com] multicast routing-enable [3Com] interface Vlan-interface 10 [3Com-Vlan-interface10] pim timer hello 40 5.1.17 register-policy Syntax register-policy acl-number undo register-policy View PIM view Parameter acl-number: Number of IP advanced ACL, defining the rule of filtering the source and group addresses. The value ranges from 3000 to 3999.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 5 PIM Configuration Commands undo spt-switch-threshold { traffic-rate | infinity } [ group-policy acl-number ] View PIM view Parameter traffic-rate: Rate of sending multicast packets in kbps, in the range of 0 to 65,535. The threshold for RPT-to-SPT switchover is 0 by default. infinity: Specifies not to switch traffic from RPT to SPT forever. acl-number: Number of a basic ACL, in the range of 2,000 to 2,999.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 5 PIM Configuration Commands 5.1.19 reset pim neighbor Syntax reset pim neighbor { all | { neighbor-address | interface interface-type interface-number } * } View User view Parameter all: All PIM neighbors neighbor-address: Specifies neighbor address. interface interface-type interface-number: Specifies VLAN interface.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 5 PIM Configuration Commands source-mask-length: Specifies mask length of the group address. incoming-interface: Specifies incoming interface for the route entry in PIM routing table. interface-type interface-number: Specifies the VLAN interface. Description Use the reset pim routing-table command to clear all PIM route entries or the specified PIM route entry.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 5 PIM Configuration Commands Description Use the source-policy command to configure the router to filter the received multicast data packets according to the source address or group address. Use the undo source-policy command to remove the configuration. If resource address filtering is configured, as well as basic ACLs, then the router filters the resource addresses of all multicast data packets received.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Multicast Chapter 5 PIM Configuration Commands acl-number: Basic ACL, used to control the range of multicast group served by static RP, which ranges from 2000 to 2999. If an ACL is not specified upon configuration, static RP will serve all multicast groups; if an ACL is specified, static RP will only serve the multicast group passing the ACL. Description Use the static-rp command to configure static RP.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – 802.1x Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 802.1x Configuration Commands .............................................................................. 1-1 1.1 802.1x Configuration Commands ...................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 display dot1x ........................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.2 dot1x..........................
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – 802.1x Chapter 1 802.1x Configuration Commands Chapter 1 802.1x Configuration Commands 1.1 802.1x Configuration Commands 1.1.1 display dot1x Syntax display dot1x [ sessions | statistics ] [ interface interface-list ] View Any view Parameter sessions: Displays the formation about 802.1x sessions. statistics: Displays the statistics information about 802.1x. interface: Display the 802.1x-related information about a specified port.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – 802.1x Chapter 1 802.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – 802.1x Chapter 1 802.1x Configuration Commands Field Description Whether to check a supplicant system that logs in through a proxy: z Proxy trap checker is disabled z Disable means the switch does not send Trap packets when it detects that a supplicant system logs in through a proxy. Enable means the switch sends Trap packets when it detects that a supplicant system logs in through a proxy.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – 802.1x Chapter 1 802.1x Configuration Commands Field Description Whether to check a supplicant system that logs in through a proxy: Proxy trap checker is disabled z z Disable means the switch does not detect supplicant login through a proxy Enable means the switch sends Trap packets when it detects that a supplicant system logs in through a proxy.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – 802.1x Chapter 1 802.1x Configuration Commands specifies the type of a port and interface-num identifies the port number. "&<1-10>" means that up to 10 port indexes/port index lists can be provided, Description Use the dot1x command to enable 802.1x globally or for specified Ethernet ports. Use the undo dot1x command to disable 802.1x globally or for specified Ethernet ports. By default, 802.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – 802.1x Chapter 1 802.1x Configuration Commands undo dot1x authentication-method View System view Parameter chap: Authenticates with the help of challenge handshake authentication protocol (CHAP). pap: Authenticates with the help of password authentication protocol (PAP). eap: Authenticates with the help of extensible authentication protocol (EAP). Description Use the dot1x authentication-method command to set the 802.1x authentication method.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – 802.1x Chapter 1 802.1x Configuration Commands undo dot1x dhcp-launch View System view Parameter None Description Use the dot1x dhcp-launch command to specify an 802.1x-enqbled switch to launch the process to authenticate a supplicant system when the supplicant system applies for a dynamic IP address through DHCP. Use the undo dot1x dhcp-launch command to disable an 802.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – 802.1x Chapter 1 802.1x Configuration Commands where interface-type specifies the type of a port and interface-num identifies the port number. "&<1-10>" means that up to 10 port indexes/port index lists can be provided. Description Use the dot1x guest-vlan command to enable the Guest VLAN function for specified ports. Use the undo dot1x guest-vlan command to disable the Guest VLAN function for specified ports.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – 802.1x Chapter 1 802.1x Configuration Commands 1.1.6 dot1x max-user Syntax dot1x max-user user-number [ interface interface-list ] undo dot1x max-user [ interface interface-list ] View System view, Ethernet port view Parameter user-number: Maximum number of users a port can accommodate, ranging from 1 to 1024. The default number is 1024.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – 802.1x Chapter 1 802.1x Configuration Commands 1.1.7 dot1x port-control Syntax dot1x port-control { auto | authorized-force | unauthorized-force } [ interface interface-list ] undo dot1x port-control [ interface interface-list ] View System view, Ethernet port view Parameter auto: Specifies to operate in auto access control mode.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – 802.1x Chapter 1 802.1x Configuration Commands Related command: display dot1x. Example # Specify Ethernet 3/0/1 port to operate in unauthorized-force access control mode. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] dot1x port-control unauthorized-force interface Ethernet 3/0/1 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – 802.1x Chapter 1 802.1x Configuration Commands Ethernet port are able to access the network without being authenticated if a supplicant system among them passes the authentication. And when the supplicant system logs off, the network is inaccessible to all other supplicant systems either. When being executed in system view, these two commands apply to all Ethernet ports of the switch if you do not provide the interface-list argument.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – 802.1x Chapter 1 802.1x Configuration Commands Example # Enable the quiet-period timer. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] dot1x quiet-period 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – 802.1x Chapter 1 802.1x Configuration Commands System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] interface Ethernet 3/0/1 [3Com-Ethernet3/0/1] dot1x re-authenticate 1.1.11 dot1x retry Syntax dot1x retry max-retry-value undo dot1x retry View System view Parameter max-retry-value: Maximum number of times that a switch sends authentication request packets to online supplicant systems. This argument ranges from 1 to 10 and defaults to 2.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – 802.1x Chapter 1 802.1x Configuration Commands 1.1.12 dot1x retry-version-max Syntax dot1x retry-version-max max-retry-version-value undo dot1x retry-version-max View System view Parameter max-retry-version-value: Maximum number of times that a switch will resend version request packets to a supplicant system. This argument ranges from 1 to 10.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – 802.1x Chapter 1 802.1x Configuration Commands View System view, Ethernet port view Parameter logoff: Disconnects a supplicant system if it logs in through a proxy or through multiple network cards. trap: Sends Trap packets if a supplicant system logs in through a proxy or through multiple network cards. interface-list: Ethernet port list.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – 802.1x z Chapter 1 802.1x Configuration Commands The 802.1x supplicant system must be able to detect whether the client uses multiple network cards, a proxy, or IE proxy; z CAMS has disabled the use of multiple network cards, a proxy server, and an IE proxy server. By default, an 802.1x supplicant system enables the use of multiple network cards, proxies, or IE proxies. If CAMS has these features disabled, it would notify the 802.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – 802.1x Chapter 1 802.1x Configuration Commands 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – 802.1x Chapter 1 802.1x Configuration Commands tx-period-value: Value of the tx-period, in seconds. This value ranges from 10 to 120 and defaults to 30. supp-timeout: Supplicant timeout timer, triggered when the switch sends a request/challenge packet (for MD5 ciphered text) to the supplicant system. If within the period, no response has been sent back from the supplicant system, the switch will resend the request/challenge packet.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – 802.1x Chapter 1 802.1x Configuration Commands 1.1.15 dot1x version-check Syntax dot1x version-check [ interface interface-list ] undo dot1x version-check [ interface interface-list ] View System view, Ethernet port view Parameter interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-name [ to interface- name] & < 1-10 >.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – 802.1x Chapter 1 802.1x Configuration Commands View User view Parameter interface-list: Ethernet port list. You can specify multiple Ethernet ports by providing this argument in the form of interface-list = { interface-name [ to interface- name] & < 1-10 >.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – 802.1x Chapter 2 HABP Configuration Commands Chapter 2 HABP Configuration Commands 2.1 HABP Configuration Commands 2.1.1 display habp Syntax display habp View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display habp command to display HABP configuration and status information. Example # Display HABP configuration and status information.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – 802.1x Chapter 2 HABP Configuration Commands 2.1.2 display habp table Syntax display habp table View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display habp table command to display the MAC address table maintained by HABP. Example # Display the MAC address table maintained by HABP.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – 802.1x Chapter 2 HABP Configuration Commands Description Use the display habp traffic command to display statistics on HABP packets. Example # Display statistics on HABP packets.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – 802.1x Chapter 2 HABP Configuration Commands If an 802.1x-enabled switch does not have HABP enabled, it cannot manage the switches attached to it. Example # Enable HABP. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] habp enable 2.1.5 habp server vlan Syntax habp server vlan vlan-id undo habp server View System view Parameter vlan-id: VLAN ID, ranging from 1 to 4,094.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – 802.1x Chapter 2 HABP Configuration Commands undo habp timer View System view Parameter interval: Interval (in seconds) to send HABP request packets. This argument ranges from 5 to 600. Description Use the habp timer command to set the interval for a switch to send HABP request packets. Use the undo habp timer command to revert to the default interval. The default interval for a switch to send HABP request packets is 20 seconds.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands ..................................... 1-1 1.1 AAA Configuration Commands.......................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 access-limit.............................................................................................................. 1-1 1.1.2 attribute ........................
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Table of Contents 1.2.16 reset stop-accounting-buffer ............................................................................... 1-40 1.2.17 retry ..................................................................................................................... 1-41 1.2.18 retry realtime-accounting..................................................................................... 1-42 1.2.19 retry stop-accounting.......
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands 1.1 AAA Configuration Commands 1.1.1 access-limit Syntax access-limit { disable | enable max-user-number } undo access-limit View ISP domain view Parameter disable: Specifies not to limit the number of access users that can be contained in current ISP domain.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands [3Com-isp-aabbcc.net] access-limit enable 500 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Note: If the accounting optional switch is turned on (with the accounting optional command) in the ISP domain to which the local user belongs or the RADIUS scheme referenced by the ISP, you cannot limit the number of accesses by the local user. That is, the attribute access-limit command does not take effect. Related command: display local-user.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands vlan vlan-id: Cuts down all user connections of the specified VLAN. vlan-id ranges from 1 to 4094. ucibindex ucib-index: Cuts down the user connection with the specified connection index. The value of ucib-index ranges from 0 to 4119. user-name user-name: Cuts down the user connection of the specified user. user-name is a character string of up to 80 characters.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands mac mac-address: Displays the connection of the user with the specified MAC address. mac-address is in dash-delimited hexadecimal notation (in the form of H-H-H). radius-scheme radius-scheme-name: Displays all user connections using the specified RADIUS scheme. radius-scheme-name is a character string of up to 32 characters.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Description Use the display domain command to display the configuration information about one specific or all ISP domains. If you execute this command without specifying any argument, the configuration of all ISP domains will be displayed.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Field Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Description Idle-cut Sets the idle-cut function. Disable means the idle-cut function is disabled; enable means the function is enabled. Self-service URL of the self-service server. Disable means the self-service server location function is disabled. After the self-service server location function is enabled, the URL of the configured self-service server.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands user-name user-name: Displays the local user who has the specified user name. user-name is a character string of up to 80 characters. The string cannot contain the following characters: /:*?<>. It can contain no more than one @ character. The pure user name (user ID, that is, the part before @) can contain no more than 55 characters.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Field Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Description Access-Limit Limit on the number of access users Bind location Whether or not bound to a port VLAN ID VLAN of the user IP address IP address of the user MAC address MAC address of the user User Privilege User privilege 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Therefore, it is necessary to distinguish between them by setting ISP domains. You can configure a complete set of independent ISP domain attributes, including AAA schemes (such as the RADIUS scheme used), for each ISP domain in ISP domain view. For the switch, each access user belongs to an ISP domain. You can configure up to 16 ISP domains in the system.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Related command: domain. Example # Allow users in ISP domain aabbcc.net to enable the idle-cut attribute in user template (that is, allow the user to use the idle-cut function), with the maximum idle time of 50 minutes and the minimum data flow of 500 bytes. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] domain aabbcc.net New Domain added.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Example # Set the level of user1 to 3. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] local-user 3Com1 [3Com-luser-3Com1] level 3 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands 1.1.11 local-user password-display-mode Syntax local-user password-display-mode { cipher-force | auto } undo local-user password-display-mode View System view Parameter cipher-force: Adopts the forcible cipher mode so that the passwords of all local users must be displayed in cipher text.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Parameter limit: Time limit in minutes, ranging from 1 to 60. The switch will send prompt messages at regular intervals to users whose remaining online time is less than this limit. interval: Interval to send prompt messages (in minutes). This argument ranges from 5 to 60 and must be a multiple of 5.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Parameter string: VLAN Name for VLAN assignment, a character string of up to 32 characters. Description Use the name command to set a VLAN name, which will be used for VLAN assignment. Use the undo name command to cancel the VLAN name. By default, an VLAN uses its VLAN ID (like VLAN 0001) as its name. This command is used for the dynamic VLAN assignment function.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Description Use the password command to set a password for the local user. Use the undo password command to cancel the password configured.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Example # Specify the scheme "3Com" as the RADIUS scheme to be used by current ISP domain "aabbcc.net". <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] domain aabbcc.net New Domain added. [3Com-isp-aabbcc.net] radius-scheme 3Com 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Related command: radius scheme and display radius Example # Specify the RADIUS scheme "3Com" as the AAA scheme referenced by the ISP domain "aabbcc.net". <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] domain aabbcc.net New Domain added. [3Com-isp-aabbcc.net] scheme radius-scheme 3Com 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD z Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Then, the user can change the password. A user can choose the [change user password] option on the client only after passing the authentication. If the user fails the authentication, this option is in grey and is unavailable. Example # Under the default ISP domain "system", set the URL of the web page used to modify user password on the self-service server to http://10.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Description Use the service-type command to authorize the user to access the specified type(s) of service(s). Use the undo service-type command to inhibit the user from accessing the specified type(s) of service(s). By default, the user is inhibited from accessing any type of service. Example # Authorize 3Com1 to access the lan-access service.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Example # Set the ISP domain aabbcc.net to the block state, so that all its offline users cannot access the network. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] domain aabbcc.net New Domain added. [3Com-isp-aabbcc.net] state block # Set 3Com1 to the block state. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD z Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Integer: If the RADIUS server assigns integer type of VLAN IDs, you can set the VLAN assignment mode to integer on the switch (this is also the default mode on the switch). Then, upon receiving an integer ID assigned by the RADIUS authentication server, the switch adds the port to the VLAN whose VLAN ID is equal to the assigned integer ID.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Caution: z You are recommended to configure the VLAN assignment mode for the switch the same as that of the assignment attribute value of the RADIUS authentication server. Configure the correct assignment mode with the vlan-assignment-mode command so that the switch correctly identifies the dynamic VLAN assigned by the server.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands interval: Interval to send Accounting-On packets, ranging from 1 to 30 and defaulting to 3 seconds. Description Use the accounting-on enable command to enable the user re-authentication upon device restart function.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Note: The switch can automatically generate the main attributes (NAS-ID, NAS-IP address and session ID) in the Accounting-On packets. However, you can also manually configure the NAS-IP address with the nas-ip command. If you choose to manually configure this attribute, be sure to configure an appropriate and legal IP address.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD z Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands After the accounting optional command is used for a RADIUS scheme, the system will no longer send real-time accounting update packets and stop-accounting packets for any user who adopts the RADIUS scheme. z This configuration takes effect only on the accounting using this RADIUS scheme. Example # Execute the accounting-optional command for the RADIUS scheme CAMS.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Related command: display radius. Example # Specify to measure data and packets in data flows sent to RADIUS server in kilobytes and kilo-packets respectively. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] radius scheme radius1 [3Com-radius-radius1] data-flow-format data kilo-byte packet kilo-packet 1.2.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands View Any view Parameter radius-scheme-name: Name of a RADIUS scheme, a character string of up to 32 characters. If this argument is not specified, this command displays the configuration information about all RADIUS schemes. Description Use the display radius command to display the configuration information about one specific or all RADIUS schemes.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Table 1-4 Description on the fields of the display radius command Field Description SchemeName Name of the RADIUS scheme Index Index number of the RADIUS scheme Type Type of the RADIUS servers Primary Auth IP/ Port/ State IP address/access port number/state of the primary authentication server Primary Acct IP/ Port/ State IP address/access port number/state of th
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Description Use the display radius statistics command to display the statistics about RADIUS packets, so as to troubleshoot RADIUS configuration. Related command: radius scheme. Example # Display the statistics about RADIUS packets.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Parameter radius-scheme radius-scheme-name: Displays the buffered stop-accounting requests of the specified RADIUS scheme. Where, radius-scheme-name is a character string of up to 32 characters. session-id session-id: Displays the buffered stop-accounting requests of the specified session ID. Where, session-id is a character string of up to 50 characters.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands undo key { accounting | authentication } View RADIUS scheme view Parameter accounting: Sets a shared key for the RADIUS accounting packets. authentication: Sets a shared key for the RADIUS authentication/authorization packets. string: Shared key, a character string of up to 16 characters. It is "3Com" by default.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands 1.2.9 local-server Syntax local-server nas-ip ip-address key password undo local-server nas-ip ip-address View System view Parameter nas-ip ip-address: Specifies the NAS-IP address of the local RADIUS server. Where, ip-address is in dotted decimal notation. key password: Specifies the shared key of the authentication server and access server.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands As a local RADIUS authentication server, the switch does not support EAP z authentication. Related command: radius scheme and state. Example # Create a network access server granted by the RADIUS authentication server with an IP address of 10.110.1.2 and a shared key of aabbcc. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Related command: display radius and radius nas-ip. Example # Set the source IP address used by the switch to send the RADIUS packets to 10.1.1.1. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] radius scheme test1 [3Com-radius-test1] nas-ip 10.1.1.1 1.2.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Related command: key, radius scheme and state. Example # Set the IP address and UDP port number of the primary accounting server of the RADIUS scheme radius1 to 10.110.1.2 and 1813. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] radius scheme radius1 [3Com-radius-radius1] primary accounting 10.110.1.2 1813 1.2.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands accounting server. At the same time, you should keep the RADIUS service port settings on the switch consistent with those on the RADIUS servers. Related command: key, radius scheme and state. Example # Set the IP address and UDP port number of the primary authentication/authorization server used by the RADIUS scheme radius1 to 10.110.1.1 and 1812.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD z Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands You can specify the source IP address used to send RADIUS packet to prevent the unreachability of the packets returned from the server due to physical interface trouble. It is recommended to use the loopback interface address as the source IP address. z You can specify only one source IP address by using this command.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands A RADIUS scheme can be referenced by multiple ISP domains simultaneously. You can configure up to 16 RADIUS schemes, including the default scheme "system". The undo radius scheme command cannot be used to delete the default RADIUS scheme. Note that you cannot delete a RADIUS scheme which is being used by an online user.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands 1.2.16 reset stop-accounting-buffer Syntax reset stop-accounting-buffer { radius-scheme radius-scheme-name | session-id session-id | time-range start-time stop-time | user-name user-name } View User view Parameter radius-scheme radius-scheme-name: Deletes the buffered stop-accounting requests depending on the specified RADIUS scheme.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Example # Delete the stop-accounting request packets buffered in the system for the user user0001@aabbcc.net. <3Com> reset stop-accounting-buffer user-name user0001@aabbcc.net # Delete the stop-accounting request packets buffered from 0:0:0 08/31/2002 to 23:59:59 08/31/2002 in the system.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Example # Set the maximum transmission times of RADIUS requests in the RADIUS scheme radius1 to five. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] radius scheme radius1 [3Com-radius-radius1] retry 5 1.2.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD z Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands A real-time account request may be sent multiple times (set by the retry command in RADIUS scheme view) for an accounting attempt. If no response is received even after the number of transmission attempts reaches the maximum, the accounting attempt fails.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Use the undo retry stop-accounting command to restore the default maximum number of transmission attempts of the buffered stop-accounting requests. Stop-accounting requests are critical to billing and will eventually affect the charges of the users; they are important for both the users and the ISP.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Related command: key, radius scheme and state. Example # Set the IP address and UDP port number of the secondary accounting server of the RADIUS scheme radius1 to 10.110.1.1 and 1813. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] radius scheme radius1 [3Com-radius-radius1] secondary accounting 10.110.1.1 1813 1.2.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands 1.2.22 server-type Syntax server-type { 3Com | standard } undo server-type View RADIUS scheme view Parameter 3Com: Specifies that the switch supports 3Com's RADIUS server. That is, it is required that the RADIUS client (on the switch) and the RADIUS server (generally the CAMS) interact with each other.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands View RADIUS scheme view Parameter primary: Specifies the server to be set is a primary RADIUS server. secondary: Specifies the server to be set is a secondary RADIUS server. accounting: Specifies the server to be set is a RADIUS accounting server. authentication: Specifies the server to be set is a RADIUS authentication/authorization server.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands 1.2.24 stop-accounting-buffer enable Syntax stop-accounting-buffer enable undo stop-accounting-buffer enable View RADIUS scheme view Parameter None Description Use the stop-accounting-buffer enable command to enable the switch to buffer the stop-accounting requests that bring no response.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands 1.2.25 timer Syntax timer seconds undo timer View RADIUS scheme view Parameter seconds: Response timeout time of RADIUS server, ranging from 1 second to 10 seconds. By default, the response timeout time of the RADIUS server is three seconds.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands 1.2.26 timer quiet Syntax timer quiet minutes undo timer quiet View RADIUS scheme view Parameter minutes: Wait time, ranging from 1 minute to 255 minutes. By default, it is 5 minutes. Description Use the timer quiet command to set the wait time for the primary server to restore the active state. Use the undo timer quiet command to restore the default wait time.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Parameter minutes: Real-time accounting interval. It ranges from 3 minutes to 60 minutes and must be a multiple of 3. By default, this interval is 12 minutes. Description Use the timer realtime-accounting command to set the real-time accounting interval. Use the undo timer realtime-accounting command to restore the default real-time accounting interval.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands undo timer response-timeout View RADIUS scheme view Parameter seconds: Response timeout time of RADIUS servers, ranging from 1 second to 10 seconds. By default, the response timeout time of the RADIUS server is three seconds. Description Use the timer response-timeout command to set the response timeout time of RADIUS servers.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Parameter with-domain: Specifies to include ISP domain names in the user names to be sent to RADIUS servers. without-domain: Specifies to exclude ISP domain names from the user names to be sent to RADIUS servers.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands 1.3 HWTACACS Configuration Commands 1.3.1 data-flow-format Syntax data-flow-format data { byte | giga-byte | kilo-byte | mega-byte } data-flow-format packet { giga-packet | kilo-packet | mega-packet | one-packet } undo data-flow-format { data | packet } View HWTACACS view Parameter data: Sets data unit. byte: Sets 'byte' as the unit of data flow.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] hwtacacs scheme test1 [3Com- hwtacacs-test1] data-flow-format data kilo-byte [3Com- hwtacacs-test1] data-flow-format packet kilo-packet 1.3.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands key authentication : 790131 key authorization : 790131 key accounting : 790131 Quiet-interval(min) : 5 Response-timeout-Interval(sec) : 5 Domain-included : No Traffic-unit : B Packet traffic-unit : one-packet ------------------------------------------------------------Total 1,1 printed 1.3.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Related command: reset stop-accounting-buffer, stop-accounting-buffer enable, and retry stop-accounting. Example # Display the stop-accounting requests buffered in the HWTACACS scheme “3Com". <3Com> display stop-accounting-buffer hwtacacs-scheme 3Com 1.3.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands 1.3.5 hwtacacs scheme Syntax hwtacacs scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name undo hwtacacs scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name undo hwtacacs scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name View System view Parameter hwtacacs-scheme-name: Specifies an HWTACACS server scheme, with a character string of up to characters.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands authorization: Specifies a shared key for the authorization server. string: Shared key, a string of up to 16 characters. Description Use the key command to configure a shared key for HWTACACS authentication, authorization or accounting server. Use the undo key command to delete the configuration. By default, no key is set for any HWTACACS server.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Description Use the nas-ip command to specify the source address for sending HWTACACS packets so that all packets sent to the TACACS server carry the same source IP address. Use the undo nas-ip command to remove the configuration.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Note that: z You are not allowed to assign the same IP address to both primary and secondary accounting servers; otherwise, unsuccessful operation is prompted. z If you repeatedly use this command, the latest configuration overwrites the previous one.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD z Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands You can remove an authentication server only when it is not being used by any active TCP connections, and the removal impacts only packets forwarded afterwards. Related command: display hwtacacs. Example # Configure a primary authentication server. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Example # Configure a primary authorization server. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] hwtacacs scheme test1 [3Com-hwtacacs-test1] primary authorization 10.163.155.13 49 1.3.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Parameter hwtacacs-scheme hwtacacs-scheme-name: Configures to delete the stop-accounting requests from the buffer according to the specified HWTACACS scheme name. The hwtacacs-scheme-name specifies the HWTACACS scheme name with a character string of up to 32 characters, excluding question marks (?).
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Parameter retry-times: Maximum number of real-time stop-accounting request attempts. It is in the range 1 to 300 and defaults to 100. Description Use the retry stop-accounting command to enable stop-accounting packet retransmission and configure the maximum number of stop-accounting request attempts.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands By default, the IP address of TACACS accounting server is 0.0.0.0. Note that: z You are not allowed to assign the same IP address to both primary and secondary accounting servers; otherwise, unsuccessful operation is prompted. z If you repeatedly use this command, the latest configuration overwrites the previous one.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD z Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands You can remove an authentication server only when it is not being used by any active TCP connections. Related command: display hwtacacs. Example # Configure a secondary server. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] hwtacacs scheme test1 [3Com-hwtacacs-test1] secondary authentication 10.163.155.13 49 1.3.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Example # Configure the secondary authorization server. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] hwtacacs scheme test1 [3Com-hwtacacs-test1] secondary authorization 10.163.155.13 49 1.3.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] hwtacacs scheme test1 [3Com-hwtacacs-test1] stop-accounting-buffer enable 1.3.18 timer quiet Syntax timer quiet minutes undo timer quiet View HWTACACS scheme view Parameter minutes: Length of the timer in minutes, in the range of 1 to 255.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands View HWTACACS scheme view Parameter minutes: Real-time accounting interval, which is a multiple of 3 in the range 3 to 60 minutes. By default, the real-time accounting interval is 12 minutes. Description Use the timer realtime-accounting command to configure a real-time accounting interval. Use the undo timer realtime-accounting command to restore the default interval.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands 1.3.20 timer response-timeout Syntax timer response-timeout seconds undo timer response-timeout View HWTACACS scheme view Parameter seconds: Length of the response timer in seconds. It ranges from 1 to 300 and defaults to 5. Description Use the timer response-timeout command to set the response timeout timer of the TACACS server.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 1 AAA & RADIUS & HWTACACS Configuration Commands Parameter with-domain: Specifies to send the username with a domain name to the TACACS server. without-domain: Specifies to send the username without any domain name to the TACACS server. Description Use the user-name-format command to configure the username format sent to the TACACS server.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD Chapter 2 EAD Configuration Commands Chapter 2 EAD Configuration Commands 2.1 EAD Configuration Commands 2.1.1 security-policy-server Syntax security-policy-server ip-address undo security-policy-server [ ip-address | all ] View RADIUS scheme view Parameter ip-address: IP address of the security policy server. all: All IP addresses of security policy servers.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – AAA, RADIUS, HWTACACS, EAD user-name-format without-domain … 2-2 Chapter 2 EAD Configuration Commands
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VRRP & HA Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 VRRP Configuration Commands ............................................................................... 1-1 1.1 VRRP Configuration Commands ....................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 debugging vrrp ........................................................................................................ 1-1 1.1.2 display vrrp ...................
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VRRP & HA Chapter 1 VRRP Configuration Commands Chapter 1 VRRP Configuration Commands 1.1 VRRP Configuration Commands 1.1.1 debugging vrrp Syntax debugging vrrp { state | packet } undo debugging vrrp { state | packet } View User view Parameter state: Debugs VRRP state. packet: Debugs VRRP packets. Description Use the debugging vrrp command to enable VRRP debugging. Use the undo debugging vrrp command to disable VRRP debugging.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VRRP & HA Chapter 1 VRRP Configuration Commands statistics: Displays VRRP statistics. virtual-router-id: VRRP backup group ID ranging from 1 to 255. Description Use the display vrrp command to display the information about the VRRP state or VRRP statistics. When VRRP status information is displayed: If the interface index and backup group ID are not specified, the state information z about all the backup groups on the switch is displayed.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VRRP & HA Chapter 1 VRRP Configuration Commands Field Description Version Errors Number of version errors VRID Errors Number of backup group ID errors Advertisement Interval Errors Number of advertisement time interval errors IP TTL Errors Number of TTL errors Auth Failures Number of authentication errors Invalid Auth Type Number of invalid authentication types Auth Type Mismatch Number of mismatched authentication types Packet Length Error
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VRRP & HA z Chapter 1 VRRP Configuration Commands If only the interface index is specified, the statistics information about all the backup groups on the interface will be cleared. z If both the interface index and backup group ID are specified, the statistics information about the specified backup group on the interface is cleared. Example # Clear the VRRP statistics on the switch. <3Com> reset vrrp statistics 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VRRP & HA Chapter 1 VRRP Configuration Commands Example # Specify the authentication type as simple, and authentication key as aabbcc. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] interface Vlan-interface 2 [3Com-Vlan-interface2] vrrp authentication-mode simple aabbcc 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VRRP & HA Chapter 1 VRRP Configuration Commands Example # Map the real MAC address of a routing interface to a virtual router IP address. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] vrrp method real-mac 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VRRP & HA Chapter 1 VRRP Configuration Commands View VLAN interface view Parameter virtual-router-id: VRRP backup group ID ranging from 1 to 255. delay-value: Delay period (in seconds) ranging from 0 to 255. Description Use the vrrp vrid preempt-mode command to configure a switch to operate in the preemptive mode and set the delay period. Use the undo vrrp vrid preempt-mode command to cancel the configuration.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VRRP & HA Chapter 1 VRRP Configuration Commands <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] interface Vlan-interface 2 [3Com-Vlan-interface2] vrrp vrid 1 preempt-mode # Set the delay period. [3Com-Vlan-interface2] vrrp vrid 1 preempt-mode timer delay 5 # Configure the switches to operate in non-preemptive mode. [3Com-Vlan-interface2] undo vrrp vrid 1 preempt-mode 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VRRP & HA Chapter 1 VRRP Configuration Commands 1.1.9 vrrp vrid timer advertise Syntax vrrp vrid virtual-router-id timer advertise adver-interval undo vrrp vrid virtual-router-id timer advertise View VLAN interface view Parameter virtual-router-id: VRRP backup group ID ranging from 1 to 255. adver-interval: Interval (in seconds) for the master switch of a backup group to send VRRP packets. This argument ranges from 1 to 255.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VRRP & HA Chapter 1 VRRP Configuration Commands Parameter virtual-router-id: VRRP backup group ID ranging form 1 to 255. Interface-type interface-number: VLAN interface to be tracked. value-reduced: Value by which the priority is to decrease. This argument ranges from 1 to 255. Description Use the vrrp vrid track command to set a VLAN interface/Ethernet port to be tracked.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VRRP & HA Chapter 1 VRRP Configuration Commands [3Com] interface Vlan-interface 2 [3Com-Vlan-interface2] vrrp vrid 1 track vlan-interface 1 reduced 50 1.1.11 vrrp vrid virtual-ip Syntax vrrp vrid virtual-router-id virtual-ip virtual-address undo vrrp vrid virtual-router-id [ virtual-ip virtual-address ] View VLAN interface view Parameter virtual-router-id: VRRP backup group ID ranging from 1 to 255.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VRRP & HA Chapter 1 VRRP Configuration Commands # Remove a backup group.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VRRP & HA Chapter 2 HA Configuration Commands Chapter 2 HA Configuration Commands 2.1 HA Configuration Commands 2.1.1 display switchover state Syntax display switchover state [ slot-id ] View Any view Parameter slot-id: Slot number of master/slave board. Description Use the display switchover state command to display the backup status of master/slave board.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VRRP & HA Chapter 2 HA Configuration Commands Description Use slave auto-update config command to enable the automatic synchronization of configuration files between the master/slave systems. Use the undo slave auto-update config command to disable the automatic synchronization. By default, the automatic synchronization of configuration files between the master and slave system is enabled. Related command: slave update configuration.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VRRP & HA Chapter 2 HA Configuration Commands View User view Parameter None Description Use the slave switchover command to perform master/slave switchover manually. When the slave board operates normally and the master board is in the real-time backup state, if you want the slave board to operate in place of the master board, you can use this command to implement master/slave switchover.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – VRRP & HA Chapter 2 HA Configuration Commands Now saving the current configuration to the slave board. Please wait... The configuration has been saved to the slave board successfully.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ARP Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 ARP Configuration Commands .................................................................................. 1-1 1.1 ARP Configuration Commands.......................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 arp check enable ..................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.2 arp max-entry ......................
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ARP Chapter 1 ARP Configuration Commands Chapter 1 ARP Configuration Commands 1.1 ARP Configuration Commands 1.1.1 arp check enable Syntax arp check enable undo arp check enable View System view Parameter None Description Use the arp check enable command to enable the ARP entry checking function, that is, to disable a switch from creating multicast MAC address ARP entries for MAC addresses learned.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ARP Chapter 1 ARP Configuration Commands Parameter number: The maximum number of the ARP entries, in the range of 4,096 to 8,192. Description Use the arp max-entry command to set the limit of the total number of the ARP entries. The value ranges from 4,096 to 8,192. Use the undo arp max-entry command to restore the limit to the default. By default, the maximum number of the ARP entries is 8,192.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ARP Chapter 1 ARP Configuration Commands [3Com] interface GigabitEthernet 3/0/1 [3Com GigabitEthernet3/0/1] arp max-dynamic-entry 6000 1.1.4 arp proxy enable Syntax arp proxy enable undo arp proxy enable View VLAN interface view Parameter None Description Use the arp proxy enable command to enable ARP proxy function. Use the undo arp proxy enable command to disable ARP proxy function.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ARP Chapter 1 ARP Configuration Commands Parameter None Description Use the arp proxy source-vlan enable command to enable the inbound VLAN ARP proxy function to process the ARP requests in the same VLAN, so as to realize the Layer 3 connectivity between the Layer 2 isolated ports.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ARP Chapter 1 ARP Configuration Commands through: Sets the maximum number of ARP packets (with the same source IP addresses, and the destination IP address is not the IP address of the current switch) sent to the CPU at a time. limit-value: Maximum number of ARP packets of a type sent to the CPU at a time. When local or total is adopted, the limit value ranges from 1 to 4294967295; when through is adopted, the value ranges from 0 to 4294967295.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ARP Chapter 1 ARP Configuration Commands mac-address: MAC address contained in the ARP mapping entry to be created, in the format of H-H-H. vlan-id: ID of the VLAN to which the static ARP entry belongs, in the range of 1 to 4094. interface-type: Type of the port to which the static ARP entry belongs. interface-number: Number of the port to which the static ARP entry belongs. Description Use the arp static command to create a static ARP mapping entry.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ARP Chapter 1 ARP Configuration Commands Description Use the arp timer aging command to configure the aging time for dynamic ARP mapping entries. Use the undo arp timer aging command to restore the default aging time. By default, the aging time for dynamic ARP mapping entries is 20 minutes. Related command: display arp timer aging. Example # Configure the aging time to be 10 minutes for dynamic ARP mapping entries.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ARP Chapter 1 ARP Configuration Commands 192.168.0.2 000d-88f8-4e88 1 Ethernet1/0/2 14 D 192.168.0.200 0014-222c-9d6a 1 Ethernet1/0/2 14 D 192.168.0.45 000d-88f6-44c1 1 Ethernet1/0/2 15 D 192.168.0.110 0011-4301-991e 1 Ethernet1/0/2 15 D 192.168.0.32 0000-e8f5-73ee 1 Ethernet1/0/2 16 D 192.168.0.3 0014-222c-aa69 1 Ethernet1/0/2 16 D 192.168.0.17 000d-88f6-379c 1 Ethernet1/0/2 17 D 192.168.0.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ARP Chapter 1 ARP Configuration Commands text: String used to filter ARP mapping entries. Description Use the display arp | command to display the ARP mapping entries related to string in a specified way. Related command: arp static, reset arp. Example # Display all the ARP mapping entries that contain the string “77”. <3Com>dis arp | include 77 Type: S-Static D-Dynamic IP Address MAC Address VLAN ID Port Name / AL ID 192.168.0.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ARP Chapter 1 ARP Configuration Commands If you specify a port in the command, the command will display the limit of the total number of ARP entries and the limit number of the dynamic ARP entries on the specified port. If you do not specify a port in the command, the command will display the limit of the total number of ARP entries and the limit number of the dynamic ARP entries on all ports.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ARP Chapter 1 ARP Configuration Commands 1.1.13 display arp proxy Syntax display arp proxy [ interface interface-type interface-number ] View Any view Parameter interface-type: Interface type. interface-number: Interface number. For more information about arguments, refer to the interface command in the Port Basic Configuration Command Manual. Description Use the display arp proxy command to display ARP proxy state: enabled/disabled.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ARP Type: S-Static Chapter 1 ARP Configuration Commands D-Dynamic IP Address MAC Address VLAN ID Port Name 10.1.1.2 00e0-fc01-0102 1 Ethernet3/0/1 Aging Type N/A S 1.1.15 display arp source-suppression Syntax display arp source-suppression View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display arp source-suppression command to display the ARP source suppression configuration information about the current switch.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ARP Chapter 1 ARP Configuration Commands Example # Display the ARP mapping table of VLAN1. <3Com> display arp vlan 1 Type: S-Static D-Dynamic IP Address MAC Address VLAN ID Port Name 10.1.1.2 00e0-fc01-0102 1 Ethernet3/0/1 Aging Type N/A S 1.1.17 display arp timer aging Syntax display arp timer aging View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display arp timer aging command to display the setting of the ARP aging timer.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ARP Chapter 1 ARP Configuration Commands Description Use the gratuitous-arp-learning enable command to enable the gratuitous ARP packet learning function. Use the undo gratuitous-arp-learning enable command to disable the gratuitous ARP packet learning function. By default, the gratuitous ARP packet learning function is enabled.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ARP Chapter 1 ARP Configuration Commands Example # Clear static ARP mapping entries.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands ................................................................... 1-1 1.1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands ........................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 dhcp enable............................................................................................................. 1-1 1.1.2 dhcp select global ....................................
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Contents 2.1.1 address-check ......................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.2 address-check dhcp-relay ....................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.3 address-check no-matched..................................................................................... 2-2 2.1.4 dhcp relay information enable .....................................
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands 1.1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands 1.1.1 dhcp enable Syntax dhcp enable undo dhcp enable View System view Parameter None Description Use the dhcp enable command to enable DHCP. Use the undo dhcp enable command to disable DHCP. By default, DHCP is enabled. You must first enable DHCP before performing other DHCP-related configurations.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands dhcp select global { interface interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] | all } undo dhcp select global { interface interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] | all } View System view/VLAN interface view Parameter interface interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ]: Specifies the interface(s) to operate in global addres
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands dhcp select interface { interface interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] | all } undo dhcp select interface { interface interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ] | all } View System view/VLAN interface view Parameter interface interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ]: Specifies the interface(s) to operate in interfa
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands Parameter None Description Use the dhcp server detect command to enable the unauthorized DHCP server detecting function. Use the undo dhcp server detect command to disable the unauthorized DHCP server detecting function. By default, the unauthorized DHCP server detecting function is disabled.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands interface interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ]: Specifies the interface(s), through which you can specify the corresponding interface address pools. all: (In comparison with the ip-address argument) Specifies all DNS server IP addresses. all: (In comparison with the interface keyword) Specifies all interface address pools.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands Parameter domain-name: Domain name of the DHCP clients whose IP addresses are from the specified interface address pool(s). This argument is a string of 3 to 50 characters. interface interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type interface-number ]: Specifies the interface(s), through which you can specify the corresponding interface address pool(s). all: Specifies all interface address pools.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands Parameter day day: Specifies the number of days. The day argument ranges from 0 to 365. hour hour: Specifies the number of hours. The hour argument ranges from 0 to 23. minute minute: Specifies the number of minutes. The minute argument ranges from 0 to 59. unlimited: Specifies that the lease time is unlimited. (But actually, the system limits the maximum lease time to about 25 years.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands high-ip-address: IP address that is not available for being assigned to DHCP clients. This argument also marks the higher end of the range of the forbidden IP addresses. Note that this argument cannot be less than the low-ip-address argument. If you do not provide this argument, only the IP address specified by the low-ip-address argument is forbidden.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands Use the undo dhcp server ip-pool command to remove a specified DHCP address pool. By default, no global DHCP address pool is created. Related command: dhcp enable. Example # Create DHCP address pool 0. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] dhcp server ip-pool 0 [3Com-dhcp-pool-0] 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands Description Use the dhcp server nbns-list command to configure NetBIOS server IP address(es) for the specified DHCP interface address pool(s). Use the undo dhcp server nbns-list command to remove the NetBIOS server IP address(es) configured for the specified DHCP interface address pool(s). By default, no NetBIOS server IP address is configured for a DHCP interface address pool.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands m-node: Specifies the m-typed mixed type. Nodes of this type are p-nodes with some broadcasting features. (The character m here stands for mixed.) h-nodeSpecifies the hybrid type. Nodes of this type are b-nodes with peer-to-peer communicating features.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands View System view/VLAN interface view Parameter code: Customized option number ranging from 2 to 254. Note that this argument cannot be 3, 6, 15, 44, 46, 50 through 55, 57 through 59. ascii ascii-string: Specifies a string that is of 1 to 63 characters. Note that each character of the string must be an ASCII character. hex hex-string&<1-10>: Specifies strings, a hexadecimal number of 1 to 8 digits.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands View System view Parameter packets number: Specifies the number of the packets to be sent in a ping test. The number argument ranges from 0 to 10 and defaults to 2. Value 0 means no packet will be sent. timeout milliseconds: Specifies the timeout time (in milliseconds) of each packet. The milliseconds argument ranges from 0 to 10,000 and defaults to 500.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands Use the undo dhcp server static-bind command to cancel an IP-MAC address binding. By default, no IP address in an address pool is statically bound. It should be noted that: z An IP address can be statically bound to only one MAC address. A MAC address can be bound with only one IP address statically.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP 10.110.1.2 Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands Jan 11 2003 11:57:07 PM Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the display dhcp server conflict command Field Description Address Conflicting IP address Discover Time Time when the conflict is detected 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands Interface pool: IP address Hardware address Lease expiration Type --- total 0 entry --- Table 1-2 Description on the fields of the display dhcp server expired command Field Description The Global pool information about the expired IP addresses of global address pools The Interface pool information about the expired IP addresses of interface address pools IP address Bound IP addresses M
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands IP Range from 4.0.0.0 to 4.255.255.255 IP Range from 5.5.5.0 to 5.5.5.0 IP Range from 5.5.5.2 to 5.5.5.255 1.1.18 display dhcp server ip-in-use Syntax display dhcp server ip-in-use { ip ip-address | pool [ pool-name ] | interface [ interface-type interface-number ] | all } View Any view Parameter ip ip-address: Specifies an IP address. pool [ pool-name ]: Specifies a global address pool.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands Table 1-3 Description on the fields of the display dhcp server ip-in-use command Field Description Address binding information of global DHCP Global pool address pools Address binding information of interface Interface pool DHCP address pools IP address Bound IP address MAC address to which the IP address is Hardware address bound Lease expiration Time when the lease expires Type Address bindin
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands Expire: 0 Interface Pool: Pool Number: 1 Binding Auto: 1 Manual: 0 Expire: 0 Boot Request: 6 Dhcp Discover: 1 Dhcp Request: 4 Dhcp Decline: 0 Dhcp Release: 1 Dhcp Inform: 0 Boot Reply: 4 Dhcp Offer: 1 Dhcp Ack: 3 Dhcp Nak: 0 Bad Messages: 0 Table 1-4 Description on the fields of the display dhcp server statistics command Field Description Global Pool Statistics about globa
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands Field Boot Reply: Description 4 Dhcp Offer: 1 Statistics about the DHCP packets sent to DHCP Dhcp Ack: 3 clients Dhcp Nak: 0 Bad Messages Number of the error DHCP packets 1.1.20 display dhcp server tree Syntax display dhcp server tree { pool [ pool-name ] | interface [ interface-type interface-number ] | all } View Any view Parameter pool [ pool-name ]: Specifies a global address pool.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands Pool name: 6 static-bind ip-address 10.10.1.2 mask 255.0.0.0 static-bind mac-address 00e0-00fc-0001 Parent node:5 option 10 ip-address 255.255.0.0 expired 1 0 0 Pool name: 7 network 10.10.1.64 mask 255.255.255.192 PrevSibling node:5 option 10 ip-address 255.0.0.0 gateway-list 2.2.2.2 dns-list 1.1.1.1 domain-name 444444 nbns-list 3.3.3.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands Field Description The address pool 6 is the child node of this node. This field can display the information about the following types of node: Child node: Displays the information about an address pool that is a child of the current address pool. Parent node: Displays the information about Child node:6 the address pool that is the parent of the current address pool.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands undo dns-list { ip-address | all } View DHCP address pool view Parameter ip-address&<1-8>: IP address of a DNS server. &<1-8> string means you can provide up to eight DNS server IP addresses. When inputting more than one IP address, separate two neighboring IP addresses with a space. all: Specifies all configured DNS server IP addresses.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands Description Use the domain-name command to configure a domain name for the DHCP clients of a global DHCP address pool. Use the undo domain-name command to remove the domain name. By default, no domain name is configured for the DHCP clients of a global DHCP address pool. Related command: dhcp server ip-pool and dhcp server domain-name. Example # Configure the domain name mydomain.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands Example # Set the lease time of the IP addresses in the global DHCP address pool 0 to 1 day, 2 hours and 3 minutes. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] dhcp server ip-pool 0 [3Com-dhcp-pool-0] expired day 1 hour 2 minute 3 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands 1.1.25 nbns-list Syntax nbns-list ip-address&<1-8> undo nbns-list { ip-address | all } View DHCP address pool view Parameter ip-address&<1-8>: IP address of a NetBIOS server. &<1-8> means you can provide up to eight NetBIOS server IP addresses. When inputting more than one IP address, separate two neighboring IP addresses with a space. all: Specifies all configured NetBIOS server IP addresses.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands View DHCP address pool view Parameter b-node: Specifies the broadcast type. Nodes of this type acquire host name-to-IP address mapping by broadcasting. p-node: Specifies the peer-to-peer type. Nodes of this type acquire host name-to-IP address mapping by communicating with the NetBIOS server. m-node: Specifies the mixed type. Nodes of this type are p-nodes with some broadcasting features.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands If neither subnet mask nor mask length is specified in this command, the default subnet mask is adopted. Description Use the network command to configure a dynamically assigned IP address range (where IP addresses will be dynamically assigned to DHCP clients). Use the undo network command to remove a dynamically assigned IP address range.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands ip-address ip-address&<1-8>: Specifies IP addresses. The &<1-8> string means that you can provide up to eight IP addresses. When entering more than one IP addresses, separate two neighboring IP addresses with a space. Description Use the option command to customize DHCP options for a global DHCP address pool. Use the undo option command to remove the customized DHCP options.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands 1.1.30 reset dhcp server ip-in-use Syntax reset dhcp server ip-in-use { all | interface [ interface-type interface-number ] | ip ip-address | pool [ pool-name ] } View User view Parameter all: Clears the dynamic address binding information about all IP addresses. interface [ interface-type interface-number ]: Clears the dynamic address binding information about a specified interface address pool.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands Description Use the reset dhcp server statistics command to clear the statistics on a DHCP server, such as the number of DHCP unrecognized packets/request packets/response packets. Related command: display dhcp server statistics. Example # Clear the statistics on a DHCP server. <3Com> reset dhcp server statistics 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands Example # Bind the IP address 10.1.1.1 (with the subnet mask 255.255.255.0) to the MAC address 0000-e03f-0305. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] dhcp server ip-pool 0 [3Com-dhcp-pool-0] static-bind ip-address 10.1.1.1 mask 255.255.255.0 [3Com-dhcp-pool-0] static-bind mac-address 0000-e03f-0305 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 1 DHCP Server Configuration Commands System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] dhcp server ip-pool 0 [3Com-dhcp-pool-0] static-bind ip-address 10.1.1.1 mask 255.255.255.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 2 DHCP Relay Configuration Commands Chapter 2 DHCP Relay Configuration Commands 2.1 DHCP Relay Configuration Commands 2.1.1 address-check Syntax address-check enable address-check disable View VLAN interface view Parameter None Description Use the address-check enable command to enable the address checking function of the DHCP relay. Use the address-check disable command to disable the address checking function of the DHCP relay.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 2 DHCP Relay Configuration Commands View VLAN interface view Parameter None Description Use the address-check dhcp-relay enable command to validate the dynamic entries generated by the DHCP relay. Use the address-check dhcp-relay disable command to invalidate the dynamic entries generated by the DHCP relay.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 2 DHCP Relay Configuration Commands Description Use the address-check no-matched enable command to forbid freely-connected clients to pass DHCP security check. Use the address-check no-matched disable command to allow freely-connected clients to pass DHCP security check. By default, freely-connected clients are not allowed to pass DHCP security check.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 2 DHCP Relay Configuration Commands Related command: dhcp relay information strategy. Example # Enable option 82 supporting on a DHCP relay. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] dhcp relay information enable 2.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 2 DHCP Relay Configuration Commands 2.1.6 dhcp-security static Syntax dhcp-security static ip-address mac-address undo dhcp-security { ip-address | all | dynamic | static } View System view Parameter ip-address: User IP address. mac-address: User MAC address. all: Removes all user address entries. dynamic: Removes dynamic user address entries. static: Removes static user address entries.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 2 DHCP Relay Configuration Commands interval: Specified refresh interval, in the range of 1 to 120 in seconds. Description Use the dhcp-security tracker command to configure the interval at which the DHCP relay refreshes the addresses entries of dynamic users. Use the undo dhcp-security tracker command to restore the default refresh interval.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 2 DHCP Relay Configuration Commands 2.1.9 dhcp-server ip Syntax dhcp-server groupNo ip ip-address&<1-8> undo dhcp-server groupNo View System view Parameter groupNo: DHCP server group number, ranging from 0 to 19. ip-address&<1-8>: IP address of the DNS server. &<1-8> indicates that up to eight IP addresses can be input, with any two IP addresses separated by a space.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 2 DHCP Relay Configuration Commands dynamic: Displays the dynamic user address entries. static: Displays the static user address entries. Description Use the display dhcp-security command to display one or all user address entries, or a specified type of user address entries in the valid user address table of a DHCP server group. Example # Display all user address entries contained in the valid user address table of the DHCP server group.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 2 DHCP Relay Configuration Commands Example # Display the interval at which the DHCP relay refreshes the address entries of dynamic users. <3Com> display dhcp-security tracker Current tracker interval: 10s 2.1.12 display dhcp-server Syntax display dhcp-server groupNo View Any view Parameter groupNo: DHCP server group number, ranging from 0 to 19.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 2 DHCP Relay Configuration Commands DHCP_DECLINE messages: 0 DHCP_DISCOVER messages: 0 DHCP_REQUEST messages: 0 DHCP_INFORM messages: 0 DHCP_RELEASE messages: 0 BOOTP_REQUEST messages: 0 BOOTP_REPLY messages: 0 Table 2-2 Description on the fields of the display dhcp-server command Field IP address of DHCP server group 0: Description DHCP server IP addresses of DHCP server group 0 Messages from this server Number of the packets received fro
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 2 DHCP Relay Configuration Commands 2.1.13 display dhcp-server interface Syntax display dhcp-server interface Vlan-interface vlan-id View Any view Parameter vlan-id: VLAN ID. Description Use the display dhcp-server interface command to display information about the DHCP server group to which a VLAN interface is mapped. Related command: dhcp-server and display dhcp-server.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 2 DHCP Relay Configuration Commands Example # Clear the statistics information of DHCP server group 2.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 3 DHCP Snooping Configuration Commands Chapter 3 DHCP Snooping Configuration Commands 3.1 DHCP Snooping Configuration Commands 3.1.1 dhcp-snooping Syntax dhcp-snooping undo dhcp-snooping View System view Parameter None Description Use the dhcp-snooping command to enable the DHCP snooping function, so as to allow the switch to listen to the DHCP broadcast packets. Use the undo dhcp-snooping command to disable the DHCP snooping function.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 3 DHCP Snooping Configuration Commands View Ethernet port view Parameter None Description Use the dhcp-snooping trust command to set an Ethernet port to a trusted port. Use the undo dhcp-snooping trust command to restore an Ethernet port to an untrusted port. DHCP snooping security allow you to set a port to a trusted port or an untrusted port, so that DHCP clients can obtain IP addresses from only valid DHCP servers.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 3 DHCP Snooping Configuration Commands Description Use the dhcp-snooping information enable command to enable DHCP-Snooping option 82. Use the undo dhcp-snooping information enable command to disable DHCP-Snooping option 82. DHCP-Snooping option 82 is disabled by default. Example # Enable DHCP-Snooping option 82. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 3 DHCP Snooping Configuration Commands 3.1.5 display dhcp-snooping trust Syntax display dhcp-snooping trust View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display dhcp-snooping trust command to display the (enabled/disabled) state of the DHCP snooping function and the trusted ports. Related command: dhcp-snooping trust. Example # Display the state of the DHCP snooping function and the trusted ports.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DHCP Chapter 3 DHCP Snooping Configuration Commands Description Use the display dhcp-snooping vlan command to display the IP-MAC mapping relations recorded by the DHCP-Snooping-enabled switch in the specified VLAN. Example # Display the IP-MAC mapping relations recorded by the DHCP-Snooping-enabled switch in VLAN 2. <3Com> display dhcp-snooping vlan 2 DHCP snooping is enabled globally. The client binding table for untrusted ports on the VLANs assigned.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ACL Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 ACL Commands........................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 ACL Configuration Commands .......................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 acl............................................................................................................................ 1-1 1.1.2 acl mode........
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ACL Chapter 1 ACL Commands Chapter 1 ACL Commands 1.1 ACL Configuration Commands Note: The A-type cards includes 3C16860, 3C16861, 3C16858, and 3C16859. 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ACL Chapter 1 ACL Commands all: Cancels all ACLs (including those identified by a number or a name). Description Use the acl command to define an ACL and enter the corresponding ACL view. Use the undo acl command to delete all entries of an ACL identified by a number or a name, or the entire ACL. By default, ACL rules are matched according to the configured order (config).
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ACL Chapter 1 ACL Commands Parameter ip-based: Performs traffic classification based on Layer 3 information. link-based: Performs traffic classification based on Layer 2 information. Description Use the acl mode command to set the traffic classification mode for the device. By default, traffic classification is performed based on Layer 3 information. Related command: acl. Note: This configuration is only effective on A type cards.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ACL Chapter 1 ACL Commands By default, the configured ACL rules sent to a port take effect in the depth-first order. Use the acl match-order { config | auto } command to set the match order of ACL rules when they are configured (before they are sent to a port). While use the acl order command is to set the match order of ACL rules after they are configured (after they are sent to a port).
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ACL Chapter 1 ACL Commands <3Com> display acl config all Basic ACL 2000, 1 rule, rule 0 permit source 1.1.1.1 0 (0 times matched) 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ACL Chapter 1 ACL Commands Description Use the display acl mode command to view the ACL running mode chosen by the switch for filtering the traffic. Example # Display the ACL running mode chosen by the switch. <3Com> display acl mode The current acl mode: ip-based. 1.1.7 display acl order Syntax display acl order View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display acl order command to display the match order of the ACL rules sent to a port.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ACL Chapter 1 ACL Commands Description Use the display acl remaining entry slot command to display the remaining ACL entries on a specified slot. The displayed content includes the entry resource type, total entries resource number, reserved entries number for system ACL, number of configured ACL entries, number of remaining ACL entries, and the corresponding start port number and end port number of each type of entry.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ACL Chapter 1 ACL Commands 1.1.9 display acl running-packet-filter Syntax display acl running-packet-filter { all | interface interface-type interface-number } View Any view Parameter all: Represents all the ACLs to be displayed (including those identified by a number or a name). interface interface-type interface-number: Interface of the switch. Description Use the display acl running -packet-filter command to view the information of the activated ACL.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ACL Chapter 1 ACL Commands Description Use the display time-range command to view the configuration and status of the current time range. For an active time range, this command displays “active”; for an inactive time range, this command displays “inactive”. Note that there is a delay (about 1 minute) when the system updates the ACL status. And the display time-range command will judge according to the current time.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ACL Chapter 1 ACL Commands Table 1-3 Description of the fields of the display time-range command Field Description Current time is 4-3-2003 Thursday 14:36:36 Time-range : tm1 ( Inactive ) from 08:30 2-5-2005 to 18:00 2/19/2005 The current time of the system. Time range tm1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ACL Chapter 1 ACL Commands the ACL combinations on service boards other than A type and the corresponding parameter description.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ACL Chapter 1 ACL Commands Table 1-6 Parameters description of ACL combinations Parameter Description Basic and advanced ACL. ip-group { acl-number | acl-name } acl-number: ACL number of basic and advanced ACL, ranging from 2,000 to 3,999. acl-name: ACL name, case insensitive string, up to 32 characters long, beginning with an English letter (a to z or A to Z), without space or quotation mark.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ACL Chapter 1 ACL Commands Description Use the packet-filter command to activate ACL on a port to filter packets. Use the undo packet-filter command to cancel it. Note: ARP packets are allowed to pass by default on the Switch 7750. You cannot use the packet-filter command to filter ARP packets, even though you have used the rule command to define a Layer 2 ACL, in which the argument protocol is defined as ARP.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ACL Chapter 1 ACL Commands Command reset traffic-statistic Function Reset statistic information of traffic. This command is applicable to the ACL which is used to filter or classify the data transmitted by the hardware of a switch. Commonly, this command is used to reset the statistics information recorded by the traffic-statistic command. Example # Clear the statistic information of ACL 2000. <3Com> reset acl counter 2000 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ACL Chapter 1 ACL Commands Before you can delete a rule, you need to specify the rule ID. If you do not know the rule ID, you can view it by the display acl command. In the case that you specify the rule ID when defining a rule: z If the rule corresponding to the specified rule ID already exists, you will edit the rule, and the modified part in the rule will replace the original content, while other parts remain unchanged.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ACL Chapter 1 ACL Commands permit: Permits packets that satisfy the condition to pass. rule-string: Rule information, which can be combination of the parameters described in Table 1-8. You need to configure the protocol argument in the rule information before you can configure other arguments. Table 1-8 Rule information Parameter Type Function Description When expressed in numerals, the value range is 1 to 255.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ACL Chapter 1 ACL Commands Note: sour-wildcard/dest-wildcard is the complement of the wildcard mask of the source/destination subnet mask. For example, you need to input 0.0.255.255 to specify the subnet mask 255.255.0.0. The arguments can be set as 0 to represent the host IP address. To define DSCP priority, you can directly input a value ranging from 0 to 63, or input a keyword listed in Table 1-9.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ACL Chapter 1 ACL Commands To define the IP precedence, you can directly input a value ranging from 0 to 7, or input a keyword listed in the following table.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ACL Chapter 1 ACL Commands Table 1-12 TCP/UDP-specific rule information Parameter Function Description Source port(s) Defines the source port information of UDP/TCP packets destination-port operator port1 [ port2 ] Destination port(s) Defines the destination port information of UDP/TCP packets The value of operator can be lt (less than), gt (greater than), eq (equal to), neq (not equal to) or range (within the range of) Only the range requires two
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ACL Chapter 1 ACL Commands Table 1-14 ICMP messages Name ICMP TYPE ICMP CODE echo Type=8 Code=0 echo-reply Type=0 Code=0 fragmentneed-DFset Type=3 Code=4 host-redirect Type=5 Code=1 host-tos-redirect Type=5 Code=3 host-unreachable Type=3 Code=1 information-reply Type=16 Code=0 information-request Type=15 Code=0 net-redirect Type=5 Code=0 net-tos-redirect Type=5 Code=2 net-unreachable Type=3 Code=0 parameter-problem Type
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ACL z Chapter 1 ACL Commands If the rule corresponding to the specified rule ID does not exists, you will create and define a new rule. z The content of a modified or created rule must not be identical with the content of any existing rule; otherwise the rule modification or creation will fail, and the system will prompt that the rule already exists.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ACL Chapter 1 ACL Commands Table 1-15 Rule information Parameter format-type lsap lsap-code lsap-wildcard source { source-addr source-mask | vlan-id }* Type Function Description Link layer encapsulation type Defines the link layer encapsulation type in the rule format-type: the value can be 802.3/802.2, 802.3, ether_ii, or snap.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ACL Chapter 1 ACL Commands To define the CoS value, you can directly input a value ranging from 0 to 7, or input a keyword listed in the following table.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ACL [3Com-acl-ethernetframe-4000] Chapter 1 ACL Commands rule deny cos 3 source 000d-88f5-97ed ffff-ffff-ffff dest 0011-4301-991e ffff-ffff-ffff 1.1.16 rule (user-defined ACL) Syntax rule [ rule-id ] { permit | deny } { rule-string rule-mask offset } &<1-8> [ time-range time-name ] undo rule rule-id View User-defined ACL view Parameter rule-id: ACL rule ID, in the range of 0 to 127. deny: Drops packets that satisfy the condition.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ACL z Chapter 1 ACL Commands If the rule corresponding to the specified rule ID already exists, you will edit the rule, and the modified part in the rule will replace the original content, while other parts remain unchanged. z If the rule corresponding to the specified rule ID does not exists, you will create and define a new rule.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ACL Chapter 1 ACL Commands end-time: End time of a special time range, in the form of hh:mm. Optional argument. days-of-the-week: Day of the week when the special time range is effective. Optional argument.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – ACL Chapter 1 ACL Commands [3Com] time-range test from 0:0 2000/1/1 1-27
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 QoS Commands........................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 QoS Commands ................................................................................................................ 1-1 1.1.1 display priority trust ................................................................................................. 1-1 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands Chapter 1 QoS Commands 1.1 QoS Commands Note: The A-type LPUs (cards) include 3C16860, 3C16861, 3C16858, and 3C16859. 1.1.1 display priority trust Syntax display priority trust View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display priority trust command to display the priority type according to which the switch puts a packet into an output queue on a port. Related command: priority-trust.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands 1.1.2 display qos cos-local-precedence-map Syntax display qos cos-local-precedence-map View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display qos cos-local-precedence-map command to view the “COS-to-local-precedence” mapping table. Example # Display the “COS-to-local-precedence” mapping table.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands command will display the QoS parameter configuration of all the ports of the switch; if you provide the interface-type interface-number argument, this command will display QoS parameter configuration of the specified port. Example # Display all the QoS parameter configuration.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands Parameter interface-type interface-number: Port index. Description Use the display qos-interface line-rate command to view the rate limit configuration (including the outbound port and the limit rate) for the outbound direction of a port or all the ports of a switch.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands Description Use the display qos-interface queue-scheduler command to display the queue scheduling mode configuration of the specified port or all ports. If the interface-type interface-number argument is not specified, you will view the queue scheduling mode parameters of all the ports. If you specify the interface-type interface-number argument, you will view the queue scheduling mode parameter of the specified port.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS 7 7 Chapter 1 QoS Commands 2560 0 0 0 0 common queue statistics(in bytes): 49152 1.1.6 display qos-interface traffic-bandwidth Syntax display qos-interface [ interface-type interface-number ] traffic-bandwidth View Any view Parameter interface-type interface-number: Port index. Description Use the display qos-interface traffic-bandwidth command to view the configuration information of the bandwidth guarantee.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands Parameter interface-type interface-number: Port index. Description Use the display qos-interface traffic-limit command to view the traffic limit configuration of a port or all the ports of a switch, including the applied ACLs for traffic limit, committed average rate (CAR), and the corresponding actions. Related command: traffic-limit. Example # Display the traffic limit configuration.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands Example # Display the traffic priority configuration. <3Com> display qos-interface traffic-priority Ethernet1/0/1: traffic-priority Outbound: Matches: Acl 2000 rule 0 running Priority action: dscp be 1.1.9 display qos-interface traffic-red Syntax display qos-interface [ interface-type interface-number ] traffic-red View Any view Parameter interface-type interface-number: Port index.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands 1.1.10 display qos-interface traffic-redirect Syntax display qos-interface [ interface-type interface-number ] traffic-redirect View Any view Parameter interface-type interface-number: Port index. Description Use the display qos-interface traffic-redirect command to view the configuration of traffic redirect.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands Description Use the display qos-interface traffic-remark-vlanid command to display the configuration of the traffic-based flexible QinQ function. The displayed information includes the ACL rules used for traffic identifying and the ID of the external VLAN tag. Related command: traffic-remark-vlanid. Example # Display the configuration of traffic-based flexible QinQ.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Matches: Acl 2000 rule 0 Chapter 1 QoS Commands running 105 packets 1.1.13 inboundcar Syntax inboundcar { enable | disable } View System view Parameter enable: Enables the inbound CAR function. disable: Disables the inbound CAR function. Description Use the inboundcar enable command to enable the inbound CAR function. Use the inboundcar disable command to disable the inbound CAR function. By default, the inbound CAR function is disabled.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands For example, if you want to set the CAR bandwidth of 2 M for the traffic matching the rule 0 on the switch, use the traffic-limit command to enable the CAR function on two ports. z If the inbound CAR function is enabled, the two ports provides guaranteed bandwidth of 2 M for the traffic matching the rule 0 on each port.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands Note: Only type-A LPUs support the rate limit configuration. Example # Limit the rate of packets on GigabitEthernet1/0/1 to 10 Mbps. <3Com> system-view [3Com] interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 [3Com-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] qos [3Com-qosb-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] line-rate 10 1.1.15 priority Syntax priority priority-level undo priority View Ethernet port view Parameter priority-level: Priority value of the port, ranging from 0 to 7.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands <3Com> system-view [3Com] interface Ethernet1/0/1 [3Com-Ethernet1/0/1] priority 7 1.1.16 priority trust Syntax priority-trust { dscp | ip-precedence | cos | local-precedence } View System view Parameter dscp: Puts a packet into the corresponding output queue on a port according to the DSCP precedence. ip-precedence: Puts a packet into the corresponding output queue on a port according to the IP precedence.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands cos precedence: cos precedence value ranges from 0 to 7, the packet whose z precedence value is 0 is put into queue 2, the packet whose precedence value is 1 is put into queue 0, the packet whose precedence value is 2 is put into queue 1. As for the left precedence values, the queue number is equal to the precedence value. For example, the packet whose precedence value is 3 is put into queue 3.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands Example # Enter QoS view of a non-type-A LPU and query the QoS configuration supported by the LPU.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands traffic-bandwidth Guarantee the bandwidth of the packets traffic-limit Limit the rate of the packets traffic-priority Specify new priority of the packets traffic-red Random early detect the packets traffic-remark-vlanid Remark vlan ID of the packets traffic-statistic Count the packets undo Cancel current setting 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands Description Use the qos cos-local-precedence-map command to configure the “CoS-to-local-precedence” mapping table. Use the undo qos cos-local-precedence-map command to restore the default values. The following is the default “CoS-to-local-precedence” mapping table.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands Table 1-3 “CoS-to-local-precedence” mapping table CoS value Local precedence 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 1.1.19 queue-scheduler Syntax queue-scheduler { rr | strict-priority | wrr queue1-weight queue2-weight queue3-weight queue4-weight queue5-weight queue6-weight queue7-weight queue8-weight } undo queue-scheduler View QoS view Parameter rr: Adopts round robin (RR) algorithm.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands By default, the SP algorithm is adopted. Related command: display qos-interface queue-scheduler. Note: Only non-type-A LPUs support the configuration of queue scheduling mode. Example # Adopt the WRR queue scheduling mode, and the weight value of each queue is 10, 5, 10, 10, 5, 10, 5, and 10.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands Parameter acl-rule: Applied ACL which can be the combination of various ACL rules. For the ways of type-A LPUs to combine ACLs and the description on related parameters, refer to Table 1-4 and Table 1-6. For the ways of non-type-A LPUs to combine ACLs and the description on related parameters, refer to Table 1-5 and Table 1-6.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands Table 1-6 Description on the parameters in the ACL combination Parameter Description Basic and advanced ACL acl-number: ACL number in the range of 2,000 to 3,999. ip-group { acl-number | acl-name } acl-name: ACL name which contains up to 32 characters. It must start with English letters (a to z or A to Z) and cannot contain spaces or quotation marks. It is not sensitive to capitals.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands Table 1-7 The reset acl counter command vs the reset traffic-statistic command Command Function Clear the ACL statistics. This command is applicable to ACLs used for filtering and classifying the traffic processed by software.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands Parameter outbound: Guarantees the bandwidth for the outbound packets sent by the port. acl-rule: Applied ACL rules which can be the combination of various ACL rules. For the ways of combining ACLs and the description on related parameters, refer to Table 1-4 and Table 1-6. system-index: Specifies an interior index value which is used when an ACL rule is applied to the port. The index value ranges from 0 to 4294,967,295.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands Note: Assume there are N flows on a port, the bandwidth of the port is Bp, the minimum guaranteed bandwidth of the ith flow is Bimin, and the maximum guaranteed bandwidth of the ith flow is Bimax, and the weight is Wi.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands 1.1.22 traffic-limit Syntax I. For type-A LPUs: traffic-limit { inbound | outbound } acl-rule [ system-index ] target-rate undo traffic-limit { inbound | outbound } acl-rule II. For non-type-A LPUs: traffic-limit inbound acl-rule [ system-index ] [ kbps ] target-rate [ exceed action ] undo traffic-limit inbound acl-rule Note: LPUs support applying the combination of IP ACL rules and link ACL rules.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS z Chapter 1 QoS Commands If the input index value is not 0 and does not conflict with the interior index used by the system, the system will adopt the index value input by you; z If the input index value is not 0 but conflicts with the interior index used by the system, the system will reassign an index value. When the specified ACL rule is not effective, the system will adopt the index value input by you.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands [3Com-Ethernet1/0/1] qos [3Com-qoss-Ethernet1/0/1] traffic-limit inbound ip-group 2000 128 # Perform traffic limit on the packets matching the permit rule in ACL 2000 on GigabitEthernet1/0/1 of a non-type-A LPU. The maximum rate is 128 kbps. <3Com> system-view [3Com] interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 [3Com-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] qos [3Com-qosb-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] traffic-limit inbound ip-group 2000 kbps 128 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands acl-rule: Applied ACL which can be the combination of various ACL rules. For the ways of type-A LPUs to combine ACLs and the description on related parameters, refer to Table 1-4 and Table 1-6. For the ways of non-type-A LPUs to combine ACLs and the description on related parameters, refer to Table 1-5 and Table 1-6. system-index: Specifies an interior index value which is used when an ACL rule is applied to the port.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands Keyword DSCP value (decimal) DSCP value (binary) cs3 24 011000 cs4 32 100000 cs5 40 101000 cs6 48 110000 cs7 56 111000 be (default) 0 000000 ip-precedence pre-value: Sets IP precedence. The pre-value argument ranges from 0 to 7. You can also enter the keywords in Table 1-9.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Keyword network-management Chapter 1 QoS Commands 802.1p priority (decimal) 7 802.1p priority value (binary) 111 Note: If you have redirected the packets to CPU, it is not recommended to set the 802.1p priority to 7, and vice versa. local-precedence pre-value: Sets local precedence. The pre-value argument ranges from 0 to 7. Description Use the traffic-priority command to enable ACLs for remarking priority.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands undo traffic-red outbound acl-rule View QoS view Parameter outbound: Performs RED operation on the sent packets. acl-rule: Applied ACL rules which can be the combination of various ACL rules. For the ways of combining ACLs and the description on related parameters, refer to Table 1-4 and Table 1-6. system-index: Specifies an interior index value which is used when an ACL rule is applied to the port.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands Related command: display qos-interface traffic-red. Note: z Only type-A LPUs support this command. z Only the permit rule can be referenced in this command and applied to hardware. Example # Perform the RED operation on the packets matching the permit rule in ACL 2000. RED parameters can be set as follows: the qstart argument is 64 KB, the qstop argument is 128 KB, and the probability argument is 20%.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands only available when the ACL rule number is specified in the command.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands 1.1.26 traffic-remark-vlanid Syntax traffic-remark-vlanid inbound acl-rule [ system-index ] remark-vlan vlan-id undo traffic-remark-vlanid inbound acl-rule Note: LPUs support applying the combination of IP ACL rules and link ACL rules. However, the field defined by the IP ACL rules and link ACL rules cannot be of more than 32 characters. Otherwise, the combination cannot be applied successfully.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands Table 1-12 Description on the parameters in the ACL combination Parameter Description Basic and advanced ACL ip-group { acl-name } acl-number | acl-number: ACL number in the range of 2,000 to 3,999. acl-name: ACL name which contains up to 32 characters. It must start with English letters (a to z or A to Z) and cannot contain spaces or quotation marks. It is not sensitive to capitals.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands Caution: z Execute the vlan-vpn enable command in the corresponding port view before executing the traffic-remark-vlanid command. z The QinQ feature cannot be enabled on a port if any of the following features is enabled on this port: GVRP, NTDP, STP, 802.1x and Voice VLAN.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands Note: LPUs support applying the combination of IP ACL rules and link ACL rules. However, the field defined by the IP ACL rules and link ACL rules cannot be of more than 32 characters. Otherwise, the combination cannot be applied successfully. View QoS view Parameter inbound: Performs traffic statistic on the packets received by the port. outbound: Performs traffic statistic on the packets sent by the port.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – QoS Chapter 1 QoS Commands Note: Only the permit rule can be referenced in this command and applied to hardware. Example # Perform traffic statistics on the packets matching the permit rule in ACL 2000.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Mirroring Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 Mirroring Commands ...................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 Mirroring Commands ......................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 display mirroring-group ........................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Mirroring Chapter 1 Mirroring Commands Chapter 1 Mirroring Commands 1.1 Mirroring Commands 1.1.1 display mirroring-group Syntax display mirroring-group { group-id | all | local | remote-destination | remote-source } View Any view Parameter group-id: Group number of a mirroring group, in the range of 1 to 20. local: Specifies the mirroring group to be a local mirroring group.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Mirroring Chapter 1 Mirroring Commands Information displayed on the source mirroring group for remote mirroring includes: z Group number z Group type: remote-source z Group status z Information of the source port z Information of the reflector port z Remote-probe VLAN information Example # Display the parameter settings of the mirroring group.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Mirroring Chapter 1 Mirroring Commands Example # Display the parameter settings of traffic mirroring on GigabitEthernet1/0/1. <3Com> display qos-interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 mirrored-to GigabitEthernet1/0/1: mirrored-to Inbound: Matches: Acl 2000 rule 0 running Mirrored to: mirroring-group 3 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Mirroring Chapter 1 Mirroring Commands Table 1-2 Combined application of ACLs on service board other than A type.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Mirroring Chapter 1 Mirroring Commands Parameter Description User-defined ACL acl-number: ACL number of the user-defined ACL, ranging from 5,000 to 5,999. user-group { acl-number | acl-name } acl-name: ACL name, up to 32 characters long, beginning with an English letter (a to z or A to Z) without space and quotation mark, not case sensitive. Number of the ACL rule, ranging from 0 to 127.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Mirroring Chapter 1 Mirroring Commands Related command: display qos-interface mirrored-to, monitor-port Example # Mirror packets that match ACL 2000 on port GigabitEthernet1/0/1 to GigabitEthernet1/0/4 through traffic mirroring.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Mirroring Chapter 1 Mirroring Commands 1.1.5 mirroring-group (only for recovery) Syntax mirroring-group group-id { inbound | outbound } mirroring-port-list mirrored-to monitor-port undo mirroring-group group-id View System view Parameter group-id: Group ID of the mirroring group, in the range of 1 to 20. inbound: Monitors the received packets only. outbound: Monitors the sending packets only. mirroring-port-list: Ethernet port list.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Mirroring Chapter 1 Mirroring Commands 1.1.6 mirroring-group mirroring-port Syntax mirroring-group group-id mirroring-port mirroring-port-list { both | inbound | outbound } undo mirroring-group group-id mirroring-port mirroring-port-list View System view/Ethernet port view Parameter group-id: Group number of a mirroring group, in the range of 1 to 20.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Mirroring Chapter 1 Mirroring Commands 1.1.7 mirroring-group mirroring-slot Syntax mirroring-group group-id mirroring-slot slot-number { inbound | outbound | both } undo mirroring-group group-id mirroring-slot slot-number { inbound | outbound | both } View System view Parameter group-id: Group number of a mirroring group, in the range of 1 to 20. slot-number: Number of the slot where the mirroring source LPU resides.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Mirroring Chapter 1 Mirroring Commands Description Use the mirroring-group monitor-port command to configure the destination port. Use the undo mirroring-group monitor-port to remove the configuration of the destination port. Note the following when you configure the destination port: z LACP must be disabled on the mirroring destination port and STP is recommended to be disabled on the port.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Mirroring Chapter 1 Mirroring Commands <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com]mirroring-group 1 monitor-slot 4 1.1.10 mirroring-group reflector-port Syntax mirroring-group group-id reflector-port reflector-port undo mirroring-group group-id reflector-port reflector-port View System view/Ethernet port view Parameter group-id: Group number of a mirroring group, in the range of 1 to 20.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Mirroring Chapter 1 Mirroring Commands 1.1.11 mirroring-group remote-probe vlan Syntax mirroring-group group-id remote-probe vlan remote-probe-vlan-id undo mirroring-group group-id remote-probe vlan remote-probe-vlan-id View System view Parameter group-id: Group number of a mirroring group, in the range of 1 to 20. remote-probe vlan remote-probe-vlan-id: Specifies the remote-probe VLAN for the mirroring group.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Mirroring Chapter 1 Mirroring Commands current VLAN is a dynamic VLAN or not. If it is a dynamic VLAN , the command fails to be executed, and the system prompts that “Can not set dynamic VLAN as remote-probe VLAN!”. Use the undo remote-probe vlan enable command to configure the remote-probe VLAN as a normal VLAN. Before configuring the remote-probe VLAN, make sure that no Access or Hybrid port belongs to this VLAN.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – PoE Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 PoE Configuration Commands .................................................................................. 1-1 1.1 PoE Configuration Commands .......................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 display poe interface ............................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.2 display poe interface power ........
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – PoE Chapter 1 PoE Configuration Commands Chapter 1 PoE Configuration Commands 1.1 PoE Configuration Commands 1.1.1 display poe interface Syntax display poe interface { interface-type interface-number | all } View Any view Parameter interface-type interface-number: Port on the switch. Refer to Command Manual – Basic Port Configuration for details. all: Displays the PoE information of all the PoE ports on the switch.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – PoE Chapter 1 PoE Configuration Commands Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the display poe interface command Field Description PoE status of the port: Disabled: Power is disabled on the port. PD searching: The port is searching PD. Port power status delivering: The port is delivering power to PD. PD disconnected: PD is disconnected. testing: The port is testing the PD. fault: Nonstandard PD is detected or failure occurs.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – PoE Chapter 1 PoE Configuration Commands Interface Ethernet3/0/12 power status: PD searching Interface Ethernet3/0/13 power status: PD searching Interface Ethernet3/0/14 power status: PD searching Interface Ethernet3/0/15 power status: PD searching Interface Ethernet3/0/16 power status: PD searching Interface Ethernet3/0/17 power status: delivering Interface Ethernet3/0/18 power status: PD searching Interface Ethernet3/0/19 power status: PD searching Inter
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – PoE Chapter 1 PoE Configuration Commands View Any view Parameter interface-type interface-number: Port on the switch. Refer to Command Manual – Port for details. all: Displays the power of all PoE ports on the switch. Description Use the display poe interface power command to view the power information of a specific port of the switch. If the all keyword is specified, the command displays the power information of all PoE ports on the switch.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – PoE Chapter 1 PoE Configuration Commands Interface Ethernet3/0/23 current power : 0 mw Interface Ethernet3/0/24 current power : 0 mw Interface Ethernet3/0/25 current power : 0 mw Interface Ethernet3/0/26 current power : 0 mw Interface Ethernet3/0/27 current power : 0 mw Interface Ethernet3/0/28 current power : 0 mw Interface Ethernet3/0/29 current power : 0 mw Interface Ethernet3/0/30 current power : 0 mw Interface Ethernet3/0/31 current power : 0 mw Inter
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – PoE Chapter 1 PoE Configuration Commands Example # Display the parameters of external PoE PSUs. <3Com> display poe powersupply Power Model :Spring Pms Power Manufacturer :Tyco Electronics Com Power Nominal Value :2400 W Power Peak Value :0 W Power Average Value :0 W Power Current Current :0 mA Power Current Voltage :54.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – PoE Chapter 1 PoE Configuration Commands Description Use the display poe pse command to display the parameters of all boards that serve as power sourcing equipment (PSE). Example # Display the parameters of all boards that serve as PSE on the switch.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – PoE Chapter 1 PoE Configuration Commands Description Use the poe enable command to enable the PoE feature on a port. Use the undo poe enable command to disable the PoE feature on a port. By default, the PoE feature on a port is enabled if the PoE feature is enabled on a board. Example # Enable the PoE feature on Ethernet3/0/1. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – PoE Chapter 1 PoE Configuration Commands Example # Enable the PoE feature on the PoE board in slot 3. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] poe enable slot 3 1.1.7 poe legacy enable slot Syntax poe legacy enable slot slot-number undo poe legacy enable slot slot-number View System view Parameter slot-number: Number of the slot where the board resides.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – PoE Chapter 1 PoE Configuration Commands [3Com] poe enable slot 2 [3Com] poe legacy enable slot 2 1.1.8 poe max-power Syntax poe max-power max-power undo poe max-power View Ethernet port view Parameter max-power: Maximum power distributed to the port, ranging from 1,000 to 15,400 in mW. Description Use the poe max-power command to configure the maximum power supplied by the current port.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – PoE Chapter 1 PoE Configuration Commands slot-num: Number of the slot where the board resides. Description Use the poe max-power command to set the maximum power of a board. Use the undo poe max-power command to restore the default maximum power of a board. By default, the maximum power of a board is 37 W. Example # Set the maximum power of the board in slot 3 to 400 W. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – PoE Chapter 1 PoE Configuration Commands 1.1.11 poe power max-value Syntax poe power max-value max-value View System view Parameter max-value: Maximum PoE power output on the switch, ranging from 37 to 2,400 in W. Description Use the poe power max-value command to set the maximum power output on the switch. By default, the maximum PoE power output on the switch is 2,400 W.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – PoE Chapter 1 PoE Configuration Commands By default, the PoE management mode of the switch is auto. This command and the PoE priority settings of PoE ports will work together to control the power feeding of the switch when the switch is reaching its full power load in power supply.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – PoE Chapter 1 PoE Configuration Commands By default, the PoE priority of a port is low. Note: This command is used together with the poe power-management command, and takes effect when the PoE power output of the switch reaches nearly to its maximum value. Example # Set the PoE priority of Ethernet3/0/1 to critical. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – PoE Chapter 1 PoE Configuration Commands Note: z The full mode is used only when you cannot use the refresh mode. z When the PSE processing software is damaged (that is, all the PoE commands cannot be successfully executed), you can use the full mode to update and restore the software.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – PoE Chapter 2 PoE PSU Supervision Configuration Commands Chapter 2 PoE PSU Supervision Configuration Commands 2.1 PoE PSU Supervision Display Commands 2.1.1 display poe-power ac-input state Syntax display poe-power ac-input state View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display poe-power ac-input state command to display the AC input state of the PoE power supply units (PSUs) contained in the external PoE power supply system.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – PoE Chapter 2 PoE PSU Supervision Configuration Commands Table 2-1 Description on the fields of the display poe-power ac-input state command Field Description Normal: The AC input is normal. Lack Phrase: The PSU is idle. AC input state of PoE PSU 1 Under Limit: The AC input voltage is lower than the lower threshold. Upper Limit: The AC input voltage is higher than the upper threshold. Fuse Broken: The fuse is broken. Switch Off: The switch is off. 2.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – PoE Chapter 2 PoE PSU Supervision Configuration Commands Table 2-2 Description on the fields of the display poe-power alarm command Field Description PSU is in normal state: The PSU operates normally. NOTLINK: The PSU is not linked (the controller fails to communicate with this PSU or the PSU is not inserted). You can clear the failure by powering off the PSU or inserting a PSU. INERROR: PSU input error. Restoring the normal AC input can clear the error.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – PoE Chapter 2 PoE PSU Supervision Configuration Commands Table 2-3 Description on the fields of the display poe-power dc-output state command Field Description Normal: The DC output is normal. Under Limit: The DC output voltage is lower than the lower threshold. DC output state of the external PoE PSU Upper Limit: The DC output voltage is higher than the upper threshold. Fuse Broken: The fuse is broken. Switch Off: The switch is off.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – PoE Chapter 2 PoE PSU Supervision Configuration Commands 2.1.5 display poe-power switch state Syntax display poe-power switch state View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display poe-power switch state command to display the number and current state of the AC power distribution switches in the external PoE PSU. Example # Display the number and current state of the AC power distribution switches.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – PoE Chapter 2 PoE PSU Supervision Configuration Commands Description Use the display supervision-module information command to display the basic information about the external PoE PSUs, including the name, the model, the specifications and output power. Example # Display the information about the PoE PSUs. <3Com> display supervision-module information Supervision Module Version : 2.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – PoE Chapter 2 PoE PSU Supervision Configuration Commands 2.2 PoE PSU Supervision Configuration Commands 2.2.1 poe-power input-thresh lower Syntax poe-power input-thresh lower string View System view Parameter string: Undervoltage alarm threshold (in V) in the format of X.X. z For 220 VAC input, it ranges from 176.0V to 264.0V z For 110 VAC input, it ranges from 90.0V to 132.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – PoE Chapter 2 PoE PSU Supervision Configuration Commands Description Use the poe-power input-thresh upper command to set the overvoltage alarm threshold of AC input for the external PoE PSUs. For 220 VAC input, the recommended value is 264.0 V; For 110VAC input, the recommended value is 132.0 V. Example # Set the overvoltage alarm threshold of AC input for the external PoE PSUs to 264.0 V. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – PoE Chapter 2 PoE PSU Supervision Configuration Commands 2.2.4 poe-power output-thresh upper Syntax poe-power output-thresh upper string View System view Parameter string: Overvoltage alarm threshold (in volts V) in the format of X.X, in the range of 55.0 to 57.0. Description Use the poe-power output-thresh upper command to set the overvoltage alarm threshold of DC output for the external PoE PSUs.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – UDP Helper Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 UDP-Helper Configuration Commands ..................................................................... 1-1 1.1 UDP-Helper Configuration Commands ............................................................................. 1-1 1.1.1 debugging udp-helper ............................................................................................. 1-1 1.1.2 display udp-helper server...................
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – UDP Helper Chapter 1 UDP-Helper Configuration Commands Chapter 1 UDP-Helper Configuration Commands 1.1 UDP-Helper Configuration Commands 1.1.1 debugging udp-helper Syntax debugging udp-helper { event | packet [ receive | send ] } undo debugging udp-helper { event | packet [ receive | send ] } View User view Parameter event: Enables/disables debugging for UDP-Helper events. event: Enables/disables debugging for sending/receiving UDP-Helper packets.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – UDP Helper Chapter 1 UDP-Helper Configuration Commands Description Use the display udp-helper server command to display the information about the configured destination servers connected to a specified VLAN interface and the number of the packets forwarded to each destination server. If you do not specified the vlan-id argument, the corresponding information about all the VLAN interfaces is displayed.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – UDP Helper Chapter 1 UDP-Helper Configuration Commands View System view Parameter None Description Use the udp-helper enable command to enable the UDP-Helper function. Use the undo udp-helper enable command to disable the UDP-Helper function. By default, UDP-Helper is disabled. Example # Enable UDP-Helper. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] udp-helper enable 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – UDP Helper Chapter 1 UDP-Helper Configuration Commands Description Use the udp-helper port command to specify a UDP-Helper destination port. Use the undo udp-helper port command to disable a port from being a UDP-Helper destination port. With UDP-Helper enabled, UDP broadcast packets with their destination port being the six default UDP ports (that is, port 69, 53, 37, 137, 138, and 49) are forwarded to the configured destination servers by default.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – UDP Helper Chapter 1 UDP-Helper Configuration Commands Related command: display udp-helper server. Example # Configure the device with its IP address being 192.1.1.2 as a destination server for the UDP broadcast packets to be forwarded on VLAN 1 interface. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com]interface Vlan-interface 1 [3Com-Vlan-interface1] udp-helper server 192.1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 SNMP Configuration Commands ............................................................................... 1-1 1.1 SNMP Configuration Commands....................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 display snmp-agent ................................................................................................. 1-1 1.1.2 display snmp-agent community......
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 1 SNMP Configuration Commands Chapter 1 SNMP Configuration Commands 1.1 SNMP Configuration Commands 1.1.1 display snmp-agent Syntax display snmp-agent { local-engineid | remote-engineid } View Any view Parameter local-engineid: Displays a local engine ID. remote-engineid: Displays a remote engine ID. Description Use the display snmp-agent command to view the engine ID of the current device.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 1 SNMP Configuration Commands Parameter read: Displays read-only community information. write: Displays read-write community information. Description Use the display snmp-agent community command to view the information about the currently configured community names for SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c. Example # Display the currently configured community names.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 1 SNMP Configuration Commands Description Use the display snmp-agent group command to view group name, security model, state of various views and storage models. Example # Display SNMP group name and security model.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 1 SNMP Configuration Commands Viewname: Displays the SNMP MIB according to the view name. view-name: SNMP MIB view to be displayed. It is a character string, ranging from 1 to 32 characters. Description Use the display snmp-agent mib-view command to view the MIB view configuration information of the current Ethernet switch. Example # Display the information about the currently configured MIB view.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 1 SNMP Configuration Commands Table 1-3 Description on the fields of the display snmp-agent mib-view command Field Description View name View name MIB Subtree MIB subtree Subtree mask Subtree mask Storage-type Storage type View Type Includes or excludes access to an MIB object View status: active/inactive Indicates the MIB view status: active or inactive Caution: For the above commands, when the SNMP agent is disabled, the
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 1 SNMP Configuration Commands 0 Messages which represented an illegal operation for the community supplied 0 ASN.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 1 SNMP Configuration Commands # Display the system location string. <3Com> display snmp-agent sys-info location The physical location of this node: Beijing China The above information indicates that the device location is Beijing China. # Display the current SNMP version. <3Com> display snmp-agent sys-info version SNMP version running in the system: SNMPv3 The above information indicates that the current SNMP version is SNMPv3. 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 1 SNMP Configuration Commands Table 1-4 describes the output fields. Table 1-4 Description on the fields of the display snmp-agent usm-user command Field Description User name SNMP user name Group name The group name which the SNMP user name belongs to Engine ID The character string identifying the SNMP device Storage-type Storage type of SNMP information, including volatile, nonVolatile, permanent, readOnly and other.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 1 SNMP Configuration Commands [3Com] snmp-agent trap enable [3Com] snmp-agent target-host trap address udp-domain 10.1.1.1 params securityname public [3Com] interface ethernet6/0/1 [3Com-Ethernet6/0/1] enable snmp trap updown 1.1.9 snmp-agent Syntax snmp-agent undo snmp-agent View System view Parameter None Description Use the snmp-agent command to enable SNMP Agent. Use the undo snmp-agent command to disable SNMP Agent.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 1 SNMP Configuration Commands Parameter read: Indicates that MIB object can only be read. Only the read-only community can query device information. write: Indicates that MIB object can be read and written. The read-write community can configure the device. community-name: The community name, a character string of 1 to 32 characters. view-name: The MIB view name, a character string of 1 to 32 characters.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 1 SNMP Configuration Commands View System view Parameter v1: Specifies SNMPv1. v2c: Specifies SNMPv2c. v3: Specifies SNMPv3. groupname: Group name, ranging from 1 to 32 bytes. authentication: Configures to authenticate the packet without encryption. privacy: Configures to authenticate and encrypt the packet. read-view: Sets read-only view.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 1 SNMP Configuration Commands undo snmp-agent local-engineid View System view Parameter engineid: Specifies the engine ID with a character string, only composed of 10 to 64 hexadecimal numbers. Two hexadecimal characters form an octet. Description Use the snmp-agent local-engineid command to set the engine ID of the local SNMP entity. Use the undo snmp-agent local-engineid command to restore the default setting.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 1 SNMP Configuration Commands 1.4.5.3.1), or a variable name (such as system). The character string can include wildcards (such as 1.4.5.*.*.1). Description Use snmp-agent mib-view command to create or update the view information, limiting the MIB objects to be accessed by the NMS. Use the undo snmp-agent mib-view command to cancel the current setting. By default, the view name is ViewDefault and OID is 1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 1 SNMP Configuration Commands <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] snmp-agent packet max-size 1042 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 1 SNMP Configuration Commands Example # Set contact information for system maintenance as Dial System Operator # 1234. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] snmp-agent sys-info contact Dial System Operator # 1234 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 1 SNMP Configuration Commands Use undo snmp-agent target-host command to cancel the current setting. The snmp-agent target-host command and the snmp-agent trap enable or enable snmp trap updown command must be used at the same time on the device to send Trap packets. 1) Use the snmp-agent trap enable or enable snmp trap updown command to set Trap packets allowed to send (all Trap packets can be sent by default).
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 1 SNMP Configuration Commands standard [ authentication ] [ coldstart ] [ linkdown ] [ linkup ] [ warmstart ]: Configures to send SNMP standard notification or traps. authentication: Configures to send the authentication trap information of the SNMP protocol when authentication fails. coldstart: Configures to send the coldstart trap information when the switch restarts.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 1 SNMP Configuration Commands View System view Parameter seconds: Aging time, in seconds, ranging from 1 to 2,592,000. Description Use the snmp-agent trap life command to set aging time for Trap packets. The Trap packets exceeding the aging time are discarded. Use the undo snmp-agent trap life command to restore the default aging time for Trap packets. By default, the aging time of SNMP Trap packets is 120 seconds.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 1 SNMP Configuration Commands By default, the length is 100. Example # Configure the queue length to 200. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] snmp-agent trap queue-size 200 1.1.20 snmp-agent trap source Syntax snmp-agent trap source { interface-type interface-number } undo snmp-agent trap source View System view Parameter nterface-type: Interface type. interface-number: Interface number.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 1 SNMP Configuration Commands Example # Configure the IP address of the VLAN interface 1 as the source address for transmitting the Trap packets. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] snmp-agent trap source Vlan-interface 1 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 1 SNMP Configuration Commands acl-number: The basic ACL number, ranging from 2,000 to 2,999. local: Represents a local entity user. engineid-string: Engine ID related to the user, ranging from 10 to 64 hexadecimal numerals. Description Use the snmp-agent usm-user command to add a new user to an SNMP group. Use the undo snmp-agent usm-user command to cancel a user from the SNMP group.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 2 RMON Configuration Commands Chapter 2 RMON Configuration Commands 2.1 RMON Configuration Commands 2.1.1 display rmon alarm Syntax display rmon alarm [entry-number ] View Any view Parameter entry-number: Alarm entry index, in the range of 1 to 65535. If you do not specify this argument, the configuration of all alarm entries is displayed.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 2 RMON Configuration Commands Field Description Samples type Sample type: change value or absolute value Variable formula Variable formula of the sampled node Sampling interval Sampling interval Rising threshold is 100 Rising threshold is 100 Falling threshold is 10 Falling threshold is 10 Alarm startup type: risingOrFallingAlarm (an alarm is triggered when the rising or falling threshold is reached) When startup enables ri
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 2 RMON Configuration Commands Event table 1 owned by abc is VALID. Description: null. Will cause log-trap when triggered, last triggered at 0days 00h:02m:27s.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 2 RMON Configuration Commands Generates eventLog 1.2 at 0days 00h:02m:27s. Description: The alarm formula defined in private alarm table 1, less than(or =) 100 with alarm value 0. Alarm sample type is absolute. Table 2-3 Description on the fields of the display rmon eventlog command Field Description Event table Event entries abc Entry creator VALID The status of the line corresponding to the line is valid Generates eventLog 1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 2 RMON Configuration Commands Dropevents :0 , octets : 0 packets :0 , broadcast packets : 0 multicast packets :0 , CRC alignment errors : 0 undersize packets :0 , oversize packets : 0 fragments :0 , jabbers : 0 collisions :0 , utilization : 0 Table 2-4 Description on the fields of the display rmon eventlog command Field Description History control entry 1 Index number in the history control table abc Entry crea
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 2 RMON Configuration Commands View Any view Parameter prialarm-entry-number: Extended alarm entry Index, in the range of 1 to 65535. If you do not specify this argument, the configuration of all the extended alarm entries is displayed. Description Use the display rmon prialarm command to display the configuration of a specified RMON extended alarm entry or all the RMON extended alarm entries. Related command: rmon prialarm.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 2 RMON Configuration Commands Field Description Falling threshold Falling threshold.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 2 RMON Configuration Commands etherStatsOctets : 3776 , etherStatsPkts etherStatsBroadcastPkts : 0 , etherStatsMulticastPkts : 30 etherStatsUndersizePkts : 0 , etherStatsOversizePkts : 0 etherStatsFragments : 0 , etherStatsJabbers : 0 , etherStatsCollisions : 0 etherStatsCRCAlignErrors : 0 : 30 etherStatsDropEvents (insufficient resources): 0 Packets received according to length (etherStatsPktsXXXtoYYYOctets): 64 : 5
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 2 RMON Configuration Commands 2.1.7 rmon alarm Syntax rmon alarm entry-number alarm-variable sampling-time { delta | absolute } rising threshold threshold-value1 event-entry1 falling threshold threshold-value2 event-entry2 [ owner text ] undo rmon alarm entry-number View System view Parameter entry-number: Alarm entry line number, in the range of 1 to 65535.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 2 RMON Configuration Commands With an alarm entry defined in an alarm group, a network device performs the following operations accordingly: z Sample the defined alarm variables (alarm-variable) once in each specified period, which is specified by the sampling-time argument. z Comparing the sampled value with the set threshold and performing the corresponding operations, as described in Table 2-7.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 2 RMON Configuration Commands 2.1.8 rmon event Syntax rmon event event-entry [ description string ] { log | trap trap-community | log-trap log-trapcommunity | none } [ owner text ] undo rmon event event-entry View System view Parameter event-entry: Event entry line number, in the range of 1 to 65535. description string: Specifies the event description, a string comprising 1 to 127 characters. log: Logs events.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 2 RMON Configuration Commands 2.1.9 rmon history Syntax rmon history entry-number buckets number interval sampling-interval [ owner text ] undo rmon history entry-number View Ethernet port view Parameter entry-number: History entry index, in the range of 1 to 65535. buckets number: Specifies the size of the history table that corresponds to the entry, in the range of 1 to 65535. Currently the device only supports 1 to 10.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 2 RMON Configuration Commands 2.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 2 RMON Configuration Commands Use the undo rmon prialarm command to remove a specified extended alarm entry. The maximum number of distances in the table depends on the hardware resources. Note: z Before adding an extended alarm entry, you need to use the rmon event command to define the events to be referenced by the entry. z Make sure the node to be monitored exists before executing the rmon event command.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 2 RMON Configuration Commands <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com]interface Ethernet 1/0/1 [3Com-Ethernet1/0/1] rmon statistics 1 [3Com-Ethernet1/0/1] quit [3Com] rmon prialarm 2 ((.1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.4.1)*100) test 10 changeratio rising_threshold 50 1 falling_threshold 5 2 entrytype forever owner user1 # Remove the extended alarm entry numbered 2 from the extended alarm table.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SNMP & RMON Chapter 2 RMON Configuration Commands Example # Add the statistics entry numbered 20 to take statistics of Ethernet1/0/1 port. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – NTP Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 NTP Configuration Commands .................................................................................. 1-1 1.1 NTP Configuration Commands.......................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 display ntp-service sessions ................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.2 display ntp-service status................
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – NTP Chapter 1 NTP Configuration Commands Chapter 1 NTP Configuration Commands 1.1 NTP Configuration Commands 1.1.1 display ntp-service sessions Syntax display ntp-service sessions [ verbose ] View Any view Parameter verbose: Displays the detailed information about all the sessions maintained by the NTP service. When you configure this command without the verbose parameter, the Ethernet switch displays the brief information about all the sessions.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – NTP Chapter 1 NTP Configuration Commands 1.1.2 display ntp-service status Syntax display ntp-service status View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display ntp-service status command to display the NTP service status. Example <3Com> display ntp-service status Service status：enabled Clock status: unsynchronized Clock stratum: 16 Reference clock ID: none Nominal frequency: 100.0000 Hz Actual frequency: 100.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – NTP Chapter 1 NTP Configuration Commands Field Nominal frequency Meaning Nominal frequency of the local system hardware clock Actual frequency Actual frequency of the local system hardware clock Clock precision Precision of the local clock Clock offset Time difference between Offset of the local clock to the NTP server clock Root delay Total delay from local device to the master reference clock Root dispersion Dispersion of the local clock relat
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – NTP Chapter 1 NTP Configuration Commands undo ntp-service access { query | synchronization | server | peer } View System view Parameter query: Allows to query the local NTP service only. synchronization: Only allows the peer device to synchronize its clock to the local device.. server: Allows the peer device to perform synchronization and control query to the local device but does not permit the local device to synchronize its clock to the peer device.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – NTP Chapter 1 NTP Configuration Commands 1.1.5 ntp-service authentication enable Syntax ntp-service authentication enable undo ntp-service authentication enable View System view Parameter None Description Use the ntp-service authentication enable command to enable the NTP-service authentication function. Use the undo ntp-service authentication enable command to disable this function. By default, the authentication is disabled.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – NTP Chapter 1 NTP Configuration Commands Use the undo ntp-service authentication-keyid command to cancel the NTP authentication key. By default, no authentication key is configured. Currently the system supports MD5 authentication only. Example # Set MD5 authentication key 10 as hello. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] ntp-service authentication-keyid 10 authentication-mode md5 hello 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – NTP Chapter 1 NTP Configuration Commands System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] interface vlan-interface1 [3Com-Vlan-Interface1] ntp-service broadcast-client 1.1.8 ntp-service broadcast-server Syntax ntp-service broadcast-server [ authentication-keyid keyid version number ] undo ntp-service broadcast-server View VLAN interface view Parameter authentication-keyid: Specifies an authentication key.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – NTP Chapter 1 NTP Configuration Commands 1.1.9 ntp-service disable Syntax ntp-service disable undo ntp-service disable View System view Parameter None Description Use the ntp-service disable command to disable the NTP service function. Use undo ntp-service disable command to enable this function. By default, the NTP service is enabled. Example # Disable NTP service on the device. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – NTP Chapter 1 NTP Configuration Commands By default, an interface is enabled to receive NTP messages. Example # Disable Vlan-interface 1 from receiving NTP message. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] interface vlan-interface1 [3Com-Vlan-Interface1] ntp-service in-interface disable 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – NTP Chapter 1 NTP Configuration Commands 1.1.12 ntp-service multicast-client Syntax ntp-service multicast-client [ ip-address ] undo ntp-service multicast-client [ ip-address ] View VLAN interface view Parameter ip-address: Specifies a multicast IP address of Class D. Description Use the ntp-service multicast-client command to configure the NTP multicast client mode.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – NTP Chapter 1 NTP Configuration Commands View VLAN interface view Parameter ip-address: Specifies a multicast IP address of Class D and default to 224.0.1.1. authentication-keyid: Specifies an authentication key. keyid: Key ID used in multicast, ranging from 0 to 4,294,967,295. ttl: Defines the time to live (TTL) of a multicast packet. ttl-number: Specify the TTL of a multicast packet, ranging from 1 to 255. version: Defines an NTP version number.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – NTP Chapter 1 NTP Configuration Commands View System view Parameter ip-address: Specifies the reference clock IP address as 127.127.1.u. Here, u ranges from 0 to 3. stratum: Specifies which stratum the local clock is located at. The value ranges from 1 to 15. Description Use the ntp-service refclock-master command to configure an external reference clock or the local clock as an NTP master clock.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – NTP Chapter 1 NTP Configuration Commands Parameter number: Specifies the key number, ranging from 1 to 4,294,967,295. Description Use the ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid command to configure the key as a reliable key. Use the undo ntp-service reliable authentication-keyid command to cancel the current setting. By default, no reliable key is configured.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – NTP Chapter 1 NTP Configuration Commands Use the undo ntp-service source-interface command to cancel the current setting. By default, the source address depends on the output interface. You can use this command to designate an interface of which the IP address will be the source IP address in all the NTP packets sent by the local device so that the remote device sends the response message to this interface only.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – NTP Chapter 1 NTP Configuration Commands Description Use the ntp-service unicast-peer command to configure NTP peer mode. Use the undo ntp-service unicast-peer command to cancel NTP peer mode. By default, no NTP peer mode is configured. When you do not specify a version number, the default version number is 3. When you do not specify authentication-keyid, authentication is disabled and the local server is not the first choice.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – NTP Chapter 1 NTP Configuration Commands keyid: Key ID used for transmitting messages to a remote server, ranging from 1 to 4,294,967,295. source-interface: Specifies an interface name. interface-type: Specifies an interface type and determines an interface together with the interface-number parameter. interface-number: Specifies an interface number and determines an interface together with the interface-type parameter.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands .................................................... 1-1 1.1 SSH Server Configuration Commands .............................................................................. 1-1 1.1.1 display rsa local-key-pair public .............................................................................. 1-1 1.1.2 display rsa peer-public-key ..............
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Table of Contents 1.4.6 exit......................................................................................................................... 1-29 1.4.7 get ......................................................................................................................... 1-29 1.4.8 help........................................................................................................................ 1-30 1.4.9 ls...
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands 1.1 SSH Server Configuration Commands 1.1.1 display rsa local-key-pair public Syntax display rsa local-key-pair public View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display rsa local-key-pair public command to display the public key of the host key pair (3Com_Host) and the public key of the server key pair (3Com_Server).
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands 010001 Host public key for PEM format code: ---- BEGIN SSH2 PUBLIC KEY ---AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAADAQABAAAAQQDktggASMGZdT2RL84LvqcRPkuU0OjmoID0 1dLaS8uvB7n5EZj+mTfG7gx67huMBvCL8B82Bc8m2/eJotgjGC7L ---- END SSH2 PUBLIC KEY ---- Public key code for pasting into OpenSSH authorized_keys file : ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAADAQABAAAAQQDktggASMGZdT2RL84LvqcRPkuU0OjmoID01dLaS8uv B7n5EZj+mTfG7gx6
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands Description Use the display rsa peer-public-key command to display the client public key of the specified RSA key pair. If no key name is specified, the command displays the bits number and names of all public keys of the client. Example # Display all public keys on the client. <3Com> display rsa peer-public-key brief Address Bits Name --------------------------1024 192.168.0.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands Description Use the display ssh server command to display the status or session information about the SSH server. Related command: ssh server authentication-retries, ssh server timeout. Example # Display the status information about the SSH server. <3Com> display ssh server status SSH version : 1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands Field Description Retry Number of retries SerType Type of service Username User name 1.1.4 display ssh user-information Syntax display ssh user-information [ username ] View Any view Parameter username: SSH user name, a string of 1 to 80 characters.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands Description Use the peer-public-key end command to return to system view from public key view. Related command: rsa peer-public-key, public-key-code begin. Example # Exit from public key view. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] rsa peer-public-key 3Com003 [3Com-rsa-public-key] peer-public-key end [3Com] 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands Caution: z When SSH protocol is specified, to ensure a successful login, you must configure the AAA authentication using the authentication-mode scheme command. z The protocol inbound ssh configuration fails if you configured authentication-mode password or authentication-mode none.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands Example # Enter public key edit view and input client public keys. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands [3Com-rsa-public-key]public-key-code begin [3Com-rsa-key-code] public-key-code end [3Com-rsa-public-key] 1.1.9 rsa local-key-pair create Syntax rsa local-key-pair create View System view Parameter None Description Use the rsa local-key-pair create command to generate RSA key pairs, including the host key pair and the server key pair.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands For a successful SSH login, you must generate the local RSA key pairs first. You just need to execute the command once, with no further action required even after the system is rebooted. Related command: rsa local-key-pair destroy, display rsa local-key-pair public, ssh server compatible-ssh1x enable. Example # Generate a local RSA key pair.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands Example # Destroy all existing RSA key pairs at the server end. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] rsa local-key-pair destroy % The name for the keys which will be destroyed is 3Com_Host . % Confirm to destroy these keys? [Y/N]:y ...................... 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands % Do you really want to remove the public key named 192.168.0.39 ? [Y/N]:y [3Com] 1.1.12 ssh authentication-type default Syntax ssh authentication-type default { password | rsa | password-publickey | all } undo ssh authentication-type default View System view Parameter password: Specifies the authentication type as password.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands 1.1.13 ssh server authentication-retries Syntax ssh server authentication-retries times undo ssh server authentication-retries View System view Parameter times: Authentication retry times. It is in the range of 1 to 5 and defaults to 3. Description Use the ssh server authentication-retries command to set the authentication retry times for SSH connections.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands View System view Parameter None Description Use the ssh server compatible-ssh1x enable command to make the server compatible with the SSHv1.x version-supporting client. Use the undo ssh server compatible-ssh1x enable command to make the server not compatible with the SSH1v.x version-supporting client. By default, the server is compatible with the SSHv1.x version-supporting client.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands Caution: This command is only effective on users whose client version is SSHv1.x. Example # Set the update interval of the server key to 3 hours. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] ssh server rekey-interval 3 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands 1.1.17 ssh user assign rsa-key Syntax ssh user username assign rsa-key keyname undo ssh user username assign rsa-key View System view Parameter username: SSH user name, a string of 1 to 80 characters. keyname: Client public key name, a string of 1 to 64 characters. Description Use the ssh user assign rsa-key command to allocate public keys to SSH users.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands rsa: Specifies the authentication type as RSA public key. password-publickey: Specifies the authentication type as both password and RSA public key. That is, the user can pass the authentication only if both the password and RSA public key are correct. Note: For the password-publickey authentication type: z SSH1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands 1.2 SSH Client Configuration Commands 1.2.1 display ssh server-info Syntax display ssh server-info View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display ssh server-info command to display the association between the server public keys configured on the client and the servers. Example # Display the association between the server public keys and the servers.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands the public key, which are generated randomly after you use the rsa local-key-pair create command on the server, should be composed of hexadecimal characters. Related command: rsa peer-public-key, public-key-code end. Example # Enter public key edit view and set server public keys. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands Example # Exit from public key edit view and save the public keys. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] rsa peer-public-key 3Com003 [3Com-rsa-public-key] public-key-code begin [3Com-rsa-key-code] public-key-code end [3Com-rsa-public-key] 1.2.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands Use the undo rsa peer-public-key key-name command to delete the configured server public key. You can use the rsa peer-public-key command along with the public-key-code begin command to configure on the client the server public keys, which are generated randomly after you use the rsa local-key-pair create command.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands [3Com] ssh client 192.168.0.1 assign rsa-key abc 1.2.7 ssh client first-time enable Syntax ssh client first-time enable undo ssh client first-time View System view Parameter None Description Use the ssh client first-time enable command to configure the client to run the initial authentication. Use the undo ssh client first-time command to remove the configuration.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands 1.2.8 ssh2 Syntax ssh2 { host-ip | host-name } [ port-num ] [ prefer_kex { dh_group1 | dh_exchange_group } ] [ prefer_ctos_cipher { des | aes128 } ] [ prefer_stoc_cipher { des | aes128 } ] [ prefer_ctos_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96 | md5 | md5_96 } ] [ prefer_stoc_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96 | md5 | md5_96 } ] View System view Parameter host-ip: Server IP address.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands Note: z DES (Data Encryption Standard) is the standard algorithm for data encryption. z AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is the advanced encryption standard algorithm.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands undo sftp server View System view Parameter None Description Use the sftp server enable command to enable the secure FTP (SFTP) server. Use the undo sftp server enable command to disable the SFTP server. By default, the SFTP server is disabled. Example # Enable the SFTP server. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] sftp server enable 1.3.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands Related command: display ssh user-information. Example # Specify SFTP service for SSH user kk. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] ssh user kk service-type sftp 1.4 SFTP Client Configuration Commands 1.4.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands Description Use the cd command to change the current path on the remote SFTP server. If you did not specify the remote-path argument, the current path is displayed. Note: You can use the cd.. command to return to the upper level directory. You can use the cd / command to return to the root directory of the system (that is, flash:/). Example # Change current path to new1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands 1.4.4 delete Syntax delete remote-file View SFTP Client view Parameter remote-file: Name of a file on the server. Description Use the delete command to delete the specified file from the remote SFTP server. This command has the same function as the remove command. Example # Delete file test.txt from the server. sftp-client> delete test.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands Example # Display the files in directory flash:/. sftp-client> dir flash:/ -rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 1759 Aug 23 06: 52 vrpcfg.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands Parameter remote-file: Name of the source file on the remote SFTP server. local-file: Name assigned to the file to be saved at the local end. Description Use the get command to download and save a file from a remote server. If no local file name is specified, the name of the source file is used by default. Example # Download file tt.bak and save it with name tt.txt.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands 1.4.9 ls Syntax ls [ remote-path ] View SFTP Client view Parameter remote-path: Name of the intended directory. Description Use the ls command to display the files in the specified directory on the remote SFTP server.. If the remote-path argument is not specified, the files in the current directory are displayed. This command has the same function as the dir command.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands Description Use the mkdir command to create a directory on the remote SFTP server. Example # Create directory hj test on the remote SFTP server. sftp-client>mkdir hj New directory created 1.4.11 put Syntax put local-file [ remote-file ] View SFTP Client view Parameter local-file: Name of the source file at the local end.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands Description Use the pwd command to display the current directory on the SFTP server. Example # Display the current directory on the SFTP server. sftp-client> pwd flash:/ 1.4.13 quit Syntax quit View SFTP Client view Parameter None Description Use the quit command to terminate the connection to the remote SFTP server and exit to system view.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands Description Use the remove command to delete the specified file from the remote SFTP server. This command has the same function as the delete command. Example # Delete file temp.c from the server. sftp-client> remove temp.c The followed File will be deleted: flash:/test2.txt Are you sure to delete it?(Y/N):y This operation may take a long time.Please wait...
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands Parameter remote-path: Name of a directory on the remote SFTP server. Description Use the rmdir command to delete the specified directory from the remote SFTP server. Example # Delete directory hello from the remote SFTP server. sftp-client>rmdir hello The followed directory will be deleted flash:/hello Are you sure to remove it?(Y/N):y Directory successfully removed 1.4.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – SSH Terminal Service Chapter 1 SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands des: DES_cbc encryption algorithm. aes128: AES_128 encryption algorithm. prefer_ctos_hmac: HMAC algorithm preference from the client to server. It defaults to SHA1_96. prefer_stoc_hmac: HMAC algorithm preference from the server to client. It defaults to SHA1_96. sha1: HMAC-SHA1 algorithm. sha1_96: HMAC-SHA1_96 algorithm. md5: HMAC-MD5 algorithm. md5_96: HMAC-MD5-96 algorithm.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – File System Management Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 File System Management Commands ....................................................................... 1-1 1.1 File System Management Commands .............................................................................. 1-1 1.1.1 cd............................................................................................................................. 1-1 1.1.2 copy................
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – File System Management Chapter 1 File System Management Commands Chapter 1 File System Management Commands Note: You can provide the directory argument in the following two ways in this chapter. z In the form of [drive] [path]. In this case, the argument can be a string containing 1 to 64 characters. z By specifying the name of a storage device, such as flash:/ and cf:/. You can provide the file-url argument in the following two ways in this chapter.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – File System Management Chapter 1 File System Management Commands Example # Change the current directory to the one named test in the flash. <3Com> pwd flash: <3Com> cd test <3Com> pwd flash:/test # Enter the root directory of the CF card. <3Com> cd cf: <3Com> pwd cf: 1.1.2 copy Syntax copy fileurl-source fileurl-dest View User view Parameter fileurl-source: Path name and file name of the source file in the Flash.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – File System Management 4 -rw- 11779 Chapter 1 File System Management Commands Apr 05 2006 10:19:48 test.txt 31877 KB total (15973 KB free) # Copy the file named test.txt, with the destination file name being test2.bak. <3Com> copy test.txt test2.bak Copy flash:/test.txt to flash:/test2.bak?[Y/N]:y ..... %Copy file flash:/test.txt to flash:/test2.bak...Done. # Display the information about the files in the current directory again.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – File System Management Chapter 1 File System Management Commands To delete the files in the recycle bin, use the reset recycle-bin command. Caution: z z The dir command does not display the information about the files in the recycle bin. To display the information about the files in the recycle bin, use the dir /all command. z For files with the same name, the recycle bin can only hold the latest deleted one. Example # Delete the file named test.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – File System Management Chapter 1 File System Management Commands <3Com> dir test2.bak Directory of flash:/ 0 -rw- 11779 Apr 05 2006 10:23:03 test2.bak 31877 KB total (15961 KB free) # Display the information about all the files (including the files in the recycle bin) in directory flash:/hello/. <3Com> dir /all flash:/hello/ Directory of flash:/hello/ 0 -rw- 11779 Apr 05 2006 10:54:16 tt.txt 1 -rw- 11779 Apr 05 2006 10:55:10 [tt2.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – File System Management Chapter 1 File System Management Commands z A syntax error in a batch file results in error messages. z This command cannot be executed recursively. Example # Execute the batch file named test.bat under the directory flash:/. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] execute test.bat 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – File System Management Chapter 1 File System Management Commands View User view Parameter device: Device name. Description Use the fixdisk command to restore space on a storage device. For unavailable memory spaces, you can use this command to restore them. Example # Restore the memory space on the flash. <3Com> fixdisk flash: Fixdisk flash: may take some time to complete. %Fixdisk unit1>flash: completed. 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – File System Management Chapter 1 File System Management Commands 1.1.9 mkdir Syntax mkdir directory View User view Parameter directory: Name of the directory to be created. Description Use the mkdir command to create a directory in the current directory. Note that the names of all the directories and files in the same directory must be unique. Example # Create a directory in the current directory, with the name being dd. <3Com> mkdir dd ...
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – File System Management Chapter 1 File System Management Commands 1.1.11 move Syntax move fileurl-source fileurl-dest View User view Parameter fileurl-source: Path and file name of the source file. fileurl-dest: Path and file name of the target file. Description Use the move command to move a file to a specified directory. You can also assign a new name for the file.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – File System Management Chapter 1 File System Management Commands <3Com>move flash:/hello/tt.txt flash:/tt.txt Move flash:/hello/tt.txt to flash:/tt.txt?[Y/N]:y ... %Moved file flash:/hello/tt.txt to flash:/tt.txt. # Display the information about the files in flash:/ and flash:/hello again. <3Com> dir Directory of flash:/ 0 -rw- 4 Mar 09 2006 13:59:19 snmpboots 1 -rw- 16215134 Apr 04 2006 16:36:20 S6500-VRP310-E3128.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – File System Management Chapter 1 File System Management Commands <3Com> pwd flash: 1.1.13 rename Syntax rename fileurl-source fileurl-dest View User view Parameter fileurl-source: File name of the file to be renamed. fileurl-dest: Target file name. Description Use the rename command to rename a file. If the target file name or directory name is the same with any existing file name or directory name, you will fail to rename the file.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – File System Management Chapter 1 File System Management Commands # Display the information about the files in the current directory again. <3Com>dir Directory of flash:/ 0 -rw- 1 -rw- 2 -rw- 3 -rw- 4 drw- 5 4 Mar 09 2006 13:59:19 snmpboots Apr 04 2006 16:36:20 S6500-VRP310-E3128.app 553 Jan 21 2006 17:05:55 diaginfo.txt 3906 Apr 04 2006 17:23:54 vrpcfg.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – File System Management Chapter 1 File System Management Commands ... %Cleared file flash:/test.txt. 1.1.15 rmdir Syntax rmdir directory View User view Parameter directory: Name of a directory. Description Use the rmdir command to delete a directory. As only empty directories can be deleted, you need to clear a directory before deleting it. Example # Delete the directory named hello.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – File System Management Chapter 1 File System Management Commands Description Use the umount cf: command to disable the CF card. After you execute this command, you need to re-install the CF card to use it again. Note: This command can be executed successfully only when the CF card is correctly installed. Example # Disable the CF card. <3Com>umount cf: %Umount cf: succeed.Current directory is changed to flash:.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – File System Management Chapter 1 File System Management Commands Example # Restore the deleted file with its path and file name being flash:/hello/tt2.txt. <3Com> undelete flash:/hello/tt2.txt Undelete flash:/hello/tt2.txt?[Y/N]:y ... %Undeleted file flash:/hello/tt2.txt.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – FTP and TFTP Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 FTP and TFTP Configuration Commands ................................................................. 1-1 1.1 FTP Server Configuration Commands............................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 display ftp-server ..................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.2 display ftp-user ....................
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – FTP and TFTP Chapter 1 FTP and TFTP Configuration Commands Chapter 1 FTP and TFTP Configuration Commands 1.1 FTP Server Configuration Commands 1.1.1 display ftp-server Syntax display ftp-server View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display ftp-server command to display the FTP server-related settings of a switch when it operates as an FTP server. You can use this command to verify FTP server-related configurations.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – FTP and TFTP Chapter 1 FTP and TFTP Configuration Commands 1.1.2 display ftp-user Syntax display ftp-user View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display ftp-user command to display the settings of the current FTP user, including the user name, host IP address, port number, connection idle time, and work directory. Example # Display FTP user settings. <3Com> display ftp-user Username 3Com Host IP 10.110.3.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – FTP and TFTP Chapter 1 FTP and TFTP Configuration Commands Description Use the ftp server enable command to enable the FTP server for users to log in. Use the undo ftp server command to disable the FTP server. By default, the FTP server is disabled to avoid potential security risks. Example # Enable the FTP server. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] ftp server enable % Start FTP server 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – FTP and TFTP Chapter 1 FTP and TFTP Configuration Commands 1.2 FTP Client Configuration Commands 1.2.1 ascii Syntax ascii View FTP client view Parameter None Description Use the ascii command to specify that files be transferred in the ASCII mode. By default, files are transferred in the ASCII mode. Example # Enter FTP client view. <3Com> ftp 2.2.2.2 Trying ... Press CTRL+K to abort Connected. 220 WFTPD 2.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – FTP and TFTP Chapter 1 FTP and TFTP Configuration Commands Parameter None Description Use the binary command to specify that files be transferred in the binary mode. Example # Enter FTP client view. <3Com> ftp 2.2.2.2 Trying ... Press CTRL+K to abort Connected. 220 WFTPD 2.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – FTP and TFTP Chapter 1 FTP and TFTP Configuration Commands Trying ... Press CTRL+K to abort Connected. 220 WFTPD 2.0 service (by Texas Imperial Software) ready for new user User(none):switch 331 Give me your password, please Password: 230 Logged in successfully [ftp] # Terminate the connections with the remote FTP server and quit to user view. [ftp] bye 221 Server closing. <3Com> 1.2.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – FTP and TFTP Chapter 1 FTP and TFTP Configuration Commands # Change the work directory to flash:/temp. [ftp] cd flash:/temp 250 CWD command successful. # Display the current work directory. [ftp] pwd 257 "flash:/temp" is current directory. 1.2.5 cdup Syntax cdup View FTP client view Parameter None Description Use the cdup command to go to the parent directory of the current directory. Example # Enter FTP client view. <3Com> ftp 2.2.2.2 Trying ...
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – FTP and TFTP Chapter 1 FTP and TFTP Configuration Commands 257 "flash:" is current directory. 1.2.6 close Syntax close View FTP client view Parameter None Description Use the close command to terminate an FTP connection without quitting FTP client view. This command has the same effect as that of the disconnect command. Example # Enter FTP client view. <3Com> ftp 2.2.2.2 Trying ... Press CTRL+K to abort Connected. 220 WFTPD 2.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – FTP and TFTP Chapter 1 FTP and TFTP Configuration Commands View FTP client view Parameter None Description Use the debugging command to enable system debugging. Use the undo debugging command to disable system debugging. Example # Enter FTP client view. <3Com> ftp 2.2.2.2 Trying ... Press CTRL+K to abort Connected. 220 WFTPD 2.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – FTP and TFTP Chapter 1 FTP and TFTP Configuration Commands Example # Enter FTP client view. <3Com> ftp 2.2.2.2 Trying ... Press CTRL+K to abort Connected. 220 WFTPD 2.0 service (by Texas Imperial Software) ready for new user User(none):switch 331 Give me your password, please Password: 230 Logged in successfully [ftp] # Delete the file named temp.c. [ftp] delete temp.c 250 DELE command successful. 1.2.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – FTP and TFTP Chapter 1 FTP and TFTP Configuration Commands Connected. 220 WFTPD 2.0 service (by Texas Imperial Software) ready for new user User(none):switch 331 Give me your password, please Password: 230 Logged in successfully [ftp] # Display the information about all the files in the current directory on the remote FTP server. [ftp] dir 200 PORT command okay 150 File Listing Follows in ASCII mode -rwxrwxrwx 1 noone nogroup 430585 Dec 21 2005 4.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – FTP and TFTP Chapter 1 FTP and TFTP Configuration Commands Description Use the disconnect command to terminate a FTP connection without quitting FTP client view. This command has the same effect as that of the close command. Example # Enter FTP client view. <3Com> ftp 2.2.2.2 Trying ... Press CTRL+K to abort Connected. 220 WFTPD 2.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – FTP and TFTP Chapter 1 FTP and TFTP Configuration Commands Example # Connect to the FTP server whose IP address is 2.2.2.2. <3Com> ftp 2.2.2.2 Trying ... Press CTRL+K to abort Connected. 220 WFTPD 2.0 service (by Texas Imperial Software) ready for new user User(none):switch 331 Give me your password, please Password: 230 Logged in successfully [ftp] 1.2.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – FTP and TFTP Chapter 1 FTP and TFTP Configuration Commands <3Com> ftp 2.2.2.2 Trying ... Press CTRL+K to abort Connected. 220 WFTPD 2.0 service (by Texas Imperial Software) ready for new user User(none):switch 331 Give me your password, please Password: 230 Logged in successfully [ftp] # Download the file named temp.c. [ftp] get temp.c 200 Port command okay. 150 Opening ASCII mode data connection for temp.c. ...226 Transfer complete.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – FTP and TFTP Chapter 1 FTP and TFTP Configuration Commands [ftp] # Display the local work directory. [ftp] lcd % Local directory now flash:/temp 1.2.14 ls Syntax ls [ remotefile [ localfile ] ] View FTP client view Parameter remotefile: Name of the remote file to be queried. Localfile: Name of the local file where the querying result is to be saved. Description Use the ls command to display the name of a specified file on a remote FTP server.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – FTP and TFTP Chapter 1 FTP and TFTP Configuration Commands [ftp] # Display the names of all the files in the current directory on the remote FTP server. [ftp] ls 200 Port command okay. 150 Opening ASCII mode data connection for *. S7750.app test.cfg s7750-1.app another.bat test default.diag 226 Transfer complete. FTP: 189 byte(s) received in 0.011 second(s) 17.18Kbyte(s)/sec. 1.2.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – FTP and TFTP Chapter 1 FTP and TFTP Configuration Commands [ftp] # Create the directory flash:/lanswitch on the FTP server. [ftp] mkdir flash:/lanswitch 257 "flash:/ lanswitch" new directory created. 1.2.16 open Syntax open { ip-address | server-name } [ port ] View FTP client view Parameter ip-address: IP address of an FTP server. server-name: Host name of the FTP server, a string comprising 1 to 20 characters.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – FTP and TFTP Chapter 1 FTP and TFTP Configuration Commands 1.2.17 passive Syntax passive undo passive View FTP client view Parameter None Description Use the passive command to set the data transfer mode to the passive mode. Use the undo passive command to set the data transfer mode to the active mode. By default, the passive mode is adopted. Example # Enter FTP client view. <3Com> ftp 2.2.2.2 Trying ... Press CTRL+K to abort Connected. 220 WFTPD 2.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – FTP and TFTP Chapter 1 FTP and TFTP Configuration Commands Parameter localfile: Name of a local file to be uploaded. remotefile: File name which the local file is to be saved as. Description Use the put command to upload a local file to an FTP server. If you do not specify the remotefile argument, the local file is saved on the FTP server using the original name. Example # Enter FTP client view. <3Com> ftp 2.2.2.2 Trying ...
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – FTP and TFTP Chapter 1 FTP and TFTP Configuration Commands Description Use the pwd command to display the work directory on an FTP server. Example # Enter FTP client view. <3Com> ftp 2.2.2.2 Trying ... Press CTRL+K to abort Connected. 220 WFTPD 2.0 service (by Texas Imperial Software) ready for new user User(none):switch 331 Give me your password, please Password: 230 Logged in successfully [ftp] # Display the work directory on the FTP server.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – FTP and TFTP Chapter 1 FTP and TFTP Configuration Commands User(none):switch 331 Give me your password, please Password: 230 Logged in successfully [ftp] # Terminate the FTP connection and quit to user view. [ftp] quit 221 Windows FTP Server (WFTPD, by Texas Imperial Software) says goodbye <3Com> 1.2.21 remotehelp Syntax remotehelp [ protocol-command ] View FTP client view Parameter protocol-command: FTP protocol command.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – FTP and TFTP Chapter 1 FTP and TFTP Configuration Commands Press CTRL+K to abort Connected. 220 WFTPD 2.0 service (by Texas Imperial Software) ready for new user User(none):switch 331 Give me your password, please Password: 230 Logged in successfully [ftp] # Display the syntax of the user command. [ftp] remotehelp user 214 Syntax: USER 1.2.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – FTP and TFTP Chapter 1 FTP and TFTP Configuration Commands [ftp] rmdir flash:/temp1 200 RMD command successful. 1.2.23 user Syntax user username [ password ] View FTP client view Parameter username: Name of the user to switch to. password: Password corresponding to the user. Description Use the user command to switch to a specified user. Example # Enter FTP client view. <3Com> ftp 2.2.2.2 Trying ... Press CTRL+K to abort Connected. 220 WFTPD 2.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – FTP and TFTP Chapter 1 FTP and TFTP Configuration Commands View FTP client view Parameter None Description Use the verbose command to enable the verbose function, which displays the execution and response information of when a command is executed. Use the undo verbose command to disable the verbose function. The verbose function is enabled by default. Example # Enter FTP client view. <3Com> ftp 2.2.2.2 Trying ... Press CTRL+K to abort Connected.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – FTP and TFTP Chapter 1 FTP and TFTP Configuration Commands source-file: Name of the file to be downloaded from the TFTP server. dest-file: File name which the downloaded file is to be saved as. Description Use the tftp get command to download a file from a TFTP server to the local switch. Related command: tftp put. Example # Download the file named abc.txt from the TFTP server whose IP address is 1.1.1.1 and save it as efg.txt. <3Com> tftp 1.1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – FTP and TFTP Chapter 1 FTP and TFTP Configuration Commands 1.3.3 tftp-server acl Syntax tftp-server acl acl-number undo tftp-server acl View System view Parameter acl-number: Basic ACL number ranging from 2000 to 2999. Description Use the tftp-server acl command to specify the ACL adopted for the connection between a TFTP client and a TFTP server. Use the undo tftp-server acl command to cancel all the ACLs adopted.
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Information Center Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 Information Center Commands .................................................................................. 1-1 1.1 Information Center Commands.......................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 display channel........................................................................................................ 1-1 1.1.
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Information Center Chapter 1 Information Center Commands Chapter 1 Information Center Commands 1.1 Information Center Commands 1.1.1 display channel Syntax display channel [ channel-number | channel-name ] View Any view Parameter channel-number: Channel number, ranging from 0 to 9, that is, the system has ten channels. channel-name: Channel name.
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Information Center Chapter 1 Information Center Commands Parameter None Description Use the display info-center command to display the operation status of information center, the configuration of information channels, and the format of time stamp. If the information records in the current log/trap buffer are less than the buffer size specified by a user, this command displays the actual log/trap information.
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Information Center Chapter 1 Information Center Commands Field Description Information about the console port, including name Console: and channel of its information channel Information about the monitor port, including name Monitor: and channel of its information channel Information about SNMP Agent, including name and SNMP Agent: number of its information channel Information about the log buffer, including its state (enabled or disabled), its maxim
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Information Center Severity Chapter 1 Information Center Commands Value Description Errors that need to be corrected alerts 2 critical 3 errors 4 warnings 5 Warnings that prompt possible errors notifications 6 Information that needs to be noticed informational 7 Normal prompting information debugging 8 Debugging information immediately Critical errors Errors that need to be considered but are not critical size buffersize: Specifies the
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Information Center Chapter 1 Information Center Commands Table 1-3 Special characters in regular expression. Special Description characters Usage restrictions The underscore, functions similar to a wildcard, can represent the following characters: _ If the first character of a regular expression is not ‘_’, the number of ‘_’ used in the expression is not ^ –– Caret restricted, but is restricted by the $ –– Dollar sign length of command line.
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Information Center Chapter 1 Information Center Commands 1.1.4 display logbuffer summary Syntax display logbuffer summary [ level severity ] View Any view Parameter Level severity: Specifies an information severity level. The severity argument ranges from 1 to 8. Description Use the display logbuffer summary command to display the statistics of the log buffer. Example # Display summary information recorded in logbuffer.
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Information Center Chapter 1 Information Center Commands Example # Display the trapbuffer status and the trap information in trapbuffer. <3Com> display trapbuffer Trapping Buffer Configuration and contents:enabled allowed max buffer size : 1024 actual buffer size : 256 channel number : 3 , channel name : trapbuffer dropped messages : 0 overwritten messages : 0 current messages : 6 #Dec 31 14:01:25 2004 3Com DEV/2/LOAD FINISHED: Trap 1.3.6.1.4.1.2011.2.23.
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Information Center Chapter 1 Information Center Commands By default, the name of channel 0 to channel 9 is (in turn) console, monitor, loghost, trapbuffer, logbuffer, snmpagent, channel6, channel7, channel8, channel9. Note that the channel names must not be the same with each other. Example # Name the channel 0 as execconsole. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] info-center channel 0 name execconsole 1.1.
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Information Center Chapter 1 Information Center Commands 1.1.8 info-center enable Syntax info-center enable undo info-center enable View System view Parameter none Description Use the info-center enable command to enable the information center function. Use the info-center enable command to disable the information center function.
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Information Center Chapter 1 Information Center Commands Parameter channel: Configure the channel to output information to buffer. channel-number: Channel number, ranging from 0 to 9, that is, system has ten channels. channel-name: Channel name, by default, the name of channel 0 to channel 9 is (in turn) console, monitor, loghost, trapbuffer, logbuffer, snmpagent, channel6, channel7, channel8, channel9.
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Information Center Chapter 1 Information Center Commands View System view Parameter host-ip-addr: IP address of info-center loghost. channel: Configures information channel of the info-center loghost. channel-number: Channel number, ranging from 0 to 9, that is, system has ten channels.
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Information Center Chapter 1 Information Center Commands 1.1.11 info-center loghost source Syntax info-center loghost source interface-type interface-number undo info-center loghost source View System view Parameter interface-type: Interface type. interface-number: Interface number. Description Use the info-center loghost source command to configure the source interface through which information is sent to the loghost.
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Information Center Chapter 1 Information Center Commands channel-name: Channel name, by default, the name of channel 0 to channel 9 is (in turn) console, monitor, loghost, trapbuffer, logbuffer, snmpagent, channel6, channel7, channel8, channel9. Description Use the info-center monitor channel command to set the channel through which information is output to user terminals.
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Information Center Chapter 1 Information Center Commands By default, the system outputs information to SNMP Agent through channel 5. Related command: snmp-agent and display info-center. Example # Configure the system to output information to the SNMP agent through channel 6. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] info-center snmp channel 6 1.1.
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Information Center Chapter 1 Information Center Commands Module name Description CLNSECHO Connectionless network protocol echo module CLST Cluster management module CMD Command line module DEV Device management module DHCP Dynamic host configuration protocol module DHCPS DHCP server module DHCPSNP DHCP snooping module DIAG Diagnosis module DLDP Device link detection protocol module DNS Domain name system module ENTEXMIB Entity extende
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Information Center Chapter 1 Information Center Commands Module name Description LETH Ethernet debugging module LQOS Lanswitch quality of service module LS Local server module MIX Dual main control network management module MODEM MODEM module MPM Multicast port management module MSDP Multicast source discovery protocol module MSTP Multiple spanning tree protocol module NAT Network address translation module NDP Neighbor discovery protoc
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Information Center Chapter 1 Information Center Commands Module name Description SYSM System management module SYSMIB System MIB module TAC Terminal access controller module TELNET Telnet module TFTPC TFTP client module TUNNEL Packets transparent transmission module UDPH UDP helper module USERLOG User log module VFS Virtual file system module VLAN Virtual local area network module VRRP VRRP (virtual router redundancy protocol) module
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Information Center Chapter 1 Information Center Commands notifications: Level 6 information, showed normally and important. informational: Level 7 information, notice to be recorded. debugging: Level 8 information, generated during the debugging progress. The default information level of each channel is shown in the following table.
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Information Center Channel Chapter 1 Information Center Commands Log information Trap information Debug information switch switch switch Channel7 Enable Enable Disable Channel8 Enable Enable Disable Channel9 Enable Enable Disable state: Sets the information state. state: Can be on or off. Description Use the info-center source command to specify the information source in the information center and the output direction.
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Information Center Chapter 1 Information Center Commands another. Use default configuration record if a module does not have any specific configuration record in the channel. Example # Enable the log information of VLAN module in SNMP channel and allow the output of the information with a level higher than emergencies. <3Com>system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] info-center source vlan channel snmp log level emergencies 1.1.
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Information Center Chapter 1 Information Center Commands System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] info-center timestamp debugging boot 1.1.16 info-center trapbuffer Syntax info-center trapbuffer [ channel { channel-number | channel-name } | size buffersize ]* undo info-center trapbuffer [ channel | size ] View System view Parameter size: Configures the size of the trap buffer. buffersize: Size of trap buffer (numbers of messages).
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Information Center Chapter 1 Information Center Commands 1.1.17 reset logbuffer Syntax reset logbuffer View User view Parameter none Description Use the reset logbuffer command to reset information in log buffer. Example # Clear information in log buffer. <3Com> reset logbuffer 1.1.18 reset trapbuffer Syntax reset trapbuffer View User view Parameter none Description Use the reset trapbuffer command to reset information in trap buffer.
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Information Center Chapter 1 Information Center Commands View User view Parameter none Description Use the terminal debugging command to configure to display the debugging information on the terminal. Use the undo terminal debugging command to configure not to display the debugging information on the terminal. By default, the displaying function is disabled. Related command: debugging commands in the System Maintaining and Debugging part of the manual.
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Information Center Chapter 1 Information Center Commands % Current terminal logging is off 1.1.21 terminal monitor Syntax terminal monitor undo terminal monitor View User view Parameter none Description Use the terminal monitor command to enable the debugging/log/trap information terminal display function. Use the undo terminal monitor command to disable these functions. By default, these functions are enabled for console users and terminal users.
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Information Center Chapter 1 Information Center Commands View User view Parameter None Description Use the terminal trapping command to enable terminal trap information display. Use the undo terminal trapping command to disable this function. By default, this function is enabled. Example # Enable trap information display.
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DNS Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 DNS Configuration Commands .................................................................................. 1-1 1.1 DNS Configuration Commands ......................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 display dns domain ................................................................................................. 1-1 1.1.2 display dns dynamic-host...............
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DNS Chapter 1 DNS Configuration Commands Chapter 1 DNS Configuration Commands 1.1 DNS Configuration Commands 1.1.1 display dns domain Syntax display dns domain View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display dns domain command to display the information in the DNS suffix list. Related command: dns domain. Example # Display the information in the DNS suffix list. <3Com> display dns domain No Domain-name 0 aaa.
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DNS Chapter 1 DNS Configuration Commands View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display dns dynamic-host command to display information about the dynamic DNS cache. The DNS Client saves successful DNS resolution results to the DNS cache. When receiving a name query, the DNS Client first looks up the DNS cache for a match. If a match is found, it returns the corresponding IP address to the user program. If not, it sends a query to the DNS Server.
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DNS Chapter 1 DNS Configuration Commands Parameter Dynamic: Displays the DNS server information dynamically obtained by DHCP or other protocols. Description Use the display dns server command to display the DNS server information. Related command: dns server. Example # Display the DNS server information. <3Com> dis dns server Domain-server IpAddress 0 169.254.65.125 1 169.254.66.
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DNS Chapter 1 DNS Configuration Commands Host Age Flags Address My 0 static 1.1.1.1 Aa 0 static 2.2.2.4 Table 1-4 Description on the fields of the display ip host command Field Host Age Description Hostname Time to live. It is always 0, meaning the static entries will never age out. A static name-to-address mapping entry can only be manually removed. Flags Type flag for the name-to-address mapping entry. It is "static" for static entries.
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DNS Chapter 1 DNS Configuration Commands Note: The DNS resolution function supported by the Switch 7750 should be used together with a DNS Server. Different DNS Servers may have differences in DNS implementation. For example, the Switch 7750 supports a domain name which includes “_”, while Windows 2000 Server may be unable to resolve the “_”. Example # Configure com as a DNS suffix. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DNS Chapter 1 DNS Configuration Commands 1.1.7 dns server Syntax dns server ip-address undo dns server [ ip-address ] View System view Parameter ip-address: IP address of a DNS server. Description Use the dns server command to configure a DNS server IP address. Use the undo dns server to remove a configured DNS server IP address. No DNS server IP address is configured by default. You can configure up to 6 DNS servers. Related command: display dns server.
3Com Swich 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – DNS Chapter 1 DNS Configuration Commands Description Use the ip host command to add a hostname-to-IP address mapping entry in the static DNS list. Use the undo ip host command to remove a mapping entry from the static DNS list. By default, there is no entry in the static DNS list. As one hostname can mapped to only one IP address, when you add multiple hostname-to-address mapping entries with the same hostname, only the last one will be valid.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 Basic System Configuration & Debugging Commands .......................................... 1-1 1.1 Basic System Configuration Commands ........................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 clock datetime ......................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.2 clock summer-time .............
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Table of Contents 3.1.13 display uplink monitor............................................................................................ 3-9 3.1.14 loadsharing enable.............................................................................................. 3-10 3.1.15 pause-protection ................................................................................................. 3-11 3.1.16 qe monitor ...............
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 1 Basic System Configuration & Debugging Commands Chapter 1 Basic System Configuration & Debugging Commands 1.1 Basic System Configuration Commands 1.1.1 clock datetime Syntax clock datetime HH:MM:SS YYYY/MM/DD View User view Parameter HH:MM:SS: Current time, where HH ranges from 0 to 23, MM and SS range from 0 to 59.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 1 Basic System Configuration & Debugging Commands clock summer-time zone-name repeating { start-time start-date end-time end-date | start-time start-year start-month start-week start-day end-time end-year end-month end-week end-day } offset-time undo clock summer-time View User view Parameter zone-name: Name of the summer time, 1 to 32 characters long.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 1 Basic System Configuration & Debugging Commands Related command: clock timezone. Example # Set the summer time named z2, which starts from 06:00:00 2002/06/08, ends until 06:00:00 2002/09/01, and is one hour ahead of the standard time.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 1 Basic System Configuration & Debugging Commands 1.1.4 language-mode Syntax language-mode { chinese | english } View User view Parameter chinese: Sets the CLI language environment to Chinese. English: Sets the CLI language environment to English.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 1 Basic System Configuration & Debugging Commands Example # Return from system view to user view. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] quit <3Com> 1.1.6 return Syntax return View System view and higher level views Parameter None Description Use the return command to return from current view to user view. The composite key has the same effect with the return command.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 1 Basic System Configuration & Debugging Commands Parameter sysname: System name of the Ethernet switch. It is a character string in length of 1 to 30 characters. By default, it is 3Com. Description Use the sysname command to set the system name of the Ethernet switch. Changing the system name will affect the CLI prompt. For example, if the system name of the switch is 3Com, the prompt for user view is <3Com>.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 1 Basic System Configuration & Debugging Commands 1.2 System Status/Information Display Commands 1.2.1 display clock Syntax display clock View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display clock command to display the current date and time of the system, so that you can adjust them if they are wrong. The maximum date and time that can be displayed by this command is 23:59:59 9999/12/31.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 1 Basic System Configuration & Debugging Commands View Any view Parameter interface-type: Interface type, supported by the switch, which can be Ethernet, GigabitEthernet, AUX, VLAN-interface and so on. interface-numbe: Interface number. module-name: Module name. Description Use the display debugging command to display enabled debugging.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 1 Basic System Configuration & Debugging Commands Example # Display the status and configuration information about user terminal interfaces. <3Com> display users UI Delay Type Ipaddress 0 AUX 0 00:00:17 8 VTY 0 01:37:55 TEL 192.168.0.200 + 9 VTY 1 00:00:00 TEL 192.168.0.3 VTY 4 00:00:00 TEL 192.168.0.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 1 Basic System Configuration & Debugging Commands Example # Display the version of the system. <3Com> display version 3Com Corporation Switch 7750 Software Version 3.02.00s168re Copyright (c) 2004-2006 3Com Corporation and its licensors. All rights reserved.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 1 Basic System Configuration & Debugging Commands 1.3 System Debugging Commands 1.3.1 debugging Syntax debugging { all [ timeout interval ] | module-name debugging-option } undo debugging { all | module-name debugging-option } View User view Parameter all: Enables or disables all debugging. timeout interval: Sets the timeout time for all debugging, in the range of 1 to 1,440 (in minutes).
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 1 Basic System Configuration & Debugging Commands 1.3.2 display diagnostic-information Syntax display diagnostic-information [ module-name ] View Any view Parameter module-name: Module name.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging z Output information to the Console. z Output information to a file. Chapter 1 Basic System Configuration & Debugging Commands You can choose one according to the prompt of the system. Example # Display operation information about ARP module, output the information to the file diaginfo.txt and save the file to the Flash memory.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 2 Network Connectivity Test Commands Chapter 2 Network Connectivity Test Commands 2.1 Network Connectivity Test Commands 2.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 2 Network Connectivity Test Commands -r: Specifies to record the routes. By default, the system does not record any route. -s packetize: Specifies the size (in bytes) of each ECHO-REQUEST packet (excluding the IP and ICMP headers). The packetize argument ranges from 20 to 32,000 and defaults to 56 bytes. -t timeout: Sets the timeout time (in ms) waiting for an ECHO-RESPONSE packet after an ECHO-REQUEST packet is sent.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 2 Network Connectivity Test Commands Example # Check the reachability of the host with IP address 202.38.160.244. <3Com> ping 202.38.160.244 ping 202.38.160.244 : 56 data bytes Reply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 sequence=1 ttl=255 time = 1ms Reply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 sequence=2 ttl=255 time = 2ms Reply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56 sequence=3 ttl=255 time = 1ms Reply from 202.38.160.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 2 Network Connectivity Test Commands -q num-packet: Sets the number of packets to be sent every time. The nqueries argument ranges from 0 to 65,535 and defaults to 3. -w timeout: Sets the timeout time to wait for ICMP error packets. The timeout argument ranges from 0 to 65,535 and defaults to 5,000 (in milliseconds).
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 2 Network Connectivity Test Commands tracert to allspice.lcs.mit.edu (18.26.0.115), 30 hops max, 40 bytes packet 1 helios.ee.lbl.gov (128.3.112.1) 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 2 lilac-dmc.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.216.1) 19 ms 19 ms 19 ms 3 lilac-dmc.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.216.1) 39 ms 19 ms 19 ms 4 ccngw-ner-cc.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.136.23) 19 ms 39 ms 39 ms 5 ccn-nerif22.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.168.22) 20 ms 39 ms 39 ms 6 128.32.197.4 (128.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 3 Device Management Commands Chapter 3 Device Management Commands 3.1 Device Management Commands 3.1.1 boot boot-loader Syntax boot boot-loader { primary | backup } file-url View User view Parameter primary: Specifies an application as primary boot application. backup: Specifies an application as backup boot application. file-url: Path + name of an APP file in the Flash memory.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 3 Device Management Commands 3.1.2 boot bootrom Syntax boot bootrom file-url slot slot-list View User view Parameter file-url: Path + name of a BootROM file (that is, a .btm file) in the Flash memory.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 3 Device Management Commands Example # Use the current boot file to upgrade the BootROM of all service cards that working normally. <3Com> boot bootrom default 3.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 3 Device Management Commands Parameter None Description Use the display boot-loader command to display the APP file that is adopted when the switch boots this time and next time. Example # Display the APP that will be adopted when the switch reboots. <3Com> display boot-loader The primary app to boot of board 0 at the next time is: flash:/ccc.app The backup app to boot of board 0 at the next time is: flash:/ddd.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 3 Device Management Commands Example # Display the CPU usage of the card on slot 0 of the switch. <3Com> display cpu slot 0 Board 0 CPU busy status: 18% in last 5 seconds 19% in last 1 minute 19% in last 5 minutes Table 3-2 Description on the fields of the display cpu command Field Description CPU busy status Indicates that the following lines describe the CPU occupancies in different time periods.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 3 Device Management Commands Example # Display board information of this switch. <3Com> display device S7750 Slot No.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 3 Device Management Commands 3.1.9 display fan Syntax display fan [ fan-id ] View Any view Parameter fan-id: ID number of a fan. Description Use the display fan command to view the working state of the built-in fans. You can check whether the fans are working normally through the command. Example # Display the working state of the fans.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 3 Device Management Commands Total Used Memory(bytes): 65234704 Used Rate: 32% Table 3-3 Description on the fields of the display memory command Field Description System Total Memory(bytes) Total memory size of the system, in unit of bytes Total Used Memory(bytes) Used memory size of the system, in unit of bytes Used Rate Percentage of the used memory # Display the current configuration information of the swi
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 3 Device Management Commands Example # Display the state of the power supply. <3Com> display power Power 1 State: Absent Power 2 State: Normal Power 3 State: Absent 3.1.12 display schedule reboot Syntax display schedule reboot View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display schedule reboot command to display information about scheduled reboot. Related command: reboot, schedule reboot at.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 3 Device Management Commands Description Use the display uplink monitor command to view information about Layer 3 connectivity between the local device and the remote device. Related command: uplink monitor. Example # View information about Layer 3 connectivity between the local device and the remote device. <3Com> display uplink monitor UpLink monitor information No. 1 Dest_IP_Addr 192.168.0.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 3 Device Management Commands Example # Enable system load sharing. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] loadsharing enable 3.1.15 pause-protection Syntax pause-protection { enable | disable } slot slot-number View System view Parameter enable: Enables pause frame protection mechanism. disable: Disables pause frame protection mechanism.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 3 Device Management Commands View System view Parameter enable: Enables queue traffic monitoring. disable: Disables queue traffic monitoring. Description Use the qe monitor command to enable/disable queue traffic monitoring. Queue traffic monitoring is disabled by default.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 3 Device Management Commands Description Use the qe monitor errpkt command to configure error packets detection function on current interface. A switch does not detect error packets on current interface by default. If the switch receives a great number of error packets, it will not be able to send/receive packets properly.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 3 Device Management Commands 3.1.19 qe monitor overflow-threshold Syntax qe monitor overflow-threshold threshold View System view Parameter threshold: Integer that sets the overall traffic threshold, ranging from 0 to 4294967295 (in bps). Description Use the qe monitor overflow-threshold command to specify the overall traffic threshold used in queue traffic monitoring.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 3 Device Management Commands Use the rdram disable command to disable RDRAM of the device. By default, RDRAM of the device is disabled. Example # Disable RDRAM of the device. <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] rdram disable 3.1.21 reboot Syntax reboot [ slot slot-number ] View User view Parameter slot slot-number: Specifies the slot number.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 3 Device Management Commands Parameter hh:mm: Reboot time, where hh (hour) ranges from 0 to 23, and mm (minute) ranges from 0 to 59. yyyy/mm/dd: Reboot date, where yyyy (year) ranges from 2,000 to 2,099, mm (month) ranges from 1 to 12, and the range of dd (day) depends on the specific month. Description Use the schedule reboot at command to schedule a reboot on the current switch and set the reboot date and time.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 3 Device Management Commands confirm?[Y/N]:y <3Com> %Apr 6 16:21:03 2005 S7750R CMD/5/REBOOT: aux0: schedule reboot parameters at 16:21:00 2005/04/06. And system will reboot at 22:00:2005 04/06/2005. 3.1.23 schedule reboot delay Syntax schedule reboot delay { hhh:mm | mmm } undo schedule reboot View User view Parameter hhh:mm: Reboot waiting delay, in the format of “hour:minute”.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 3 Device Management Commands Related command: reboot, schedule reboot at, undo schedule reboot, and display schedule reboot. Example # Suppose the current time is 16:26, schedule a reboot so that the switch reboots after 88 minutes.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 3 Device Management Commands Example # Specify the clock of the HG tunnel between cards to work in the enhanced mode. <3Com> system-view Enter system view, return to user view with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] set backboard enhance 3.1.25 temperature-limit Syntax temperature-limit slot-number down-value up-value undo temperature-limit slot-number View User view Parameter slot-number: Physical card slot number.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – System Maintenance & Debugging Chapter 3 Device Management Commands Parameter ip-address: IP address of a interface on the Layer 3 device in the remote peer. The interface connects with the local device.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Remote Ping Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 Remote Ping Commands ............................................................................................ 1-1 1.1 Remote Ping Commands................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 count........................................................................................................................ 1-1 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Remote Ping Chapter 1 Remote Ping Commands Chapter 1 Remote Ping Commands 1.1 Remote Ping Commands 1.1.1 count Syntax count times undo count View Remote Ping test group view Parameter times: Number of the test packets to be transmitted. It is in the range 1 to 15 and defaults to 1. Description Use the count command to configure the number of packets to be sent for each test. Use the undo count command to restore the default.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Remote Ping Chapter 1 Remote Ping Commands View Remote Ping test group view Parameter ip-address: Destination IP address in a test. Description Use the destination-ip command to configure the destination IP address in the test. Use the undo destination-ip command to delete the configured destination IP address. By default, no destination IP address is configured for any test.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Remote Ping Chapter 1 Remote Ping Commands Example # Use the display remote ping result command to display the test result of the test group whose administrator name is “administrator” and operation tag is “icmp”. <3Com> display remote ping result administrator icmp Remote Ping entry(admin administrator, tag icmp) test result: Destination ip address:1.1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Remote Ping Chapter 1 Remote Ping Commands Field Description Number of times of timeouts in the test Operation timeout number operation Number of times the test fails because System busy operation number the system is busy Connection fail number Number of connection failures Number of received sequence error Operation sequence errors packets Number of system resource allocation Drop operation number errors Other operation errors Number of othe
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Remote Ping Chapter 1 Remote Ping Commands Field Description Value of the test result. See the following detailed description: 1: responceReceived. It means response is received. 2: unknown. It means unknown error. 3: internalError. It means system internal error. 4: requestTimeOut. It means timeout waiting for response. 5: unknownDestinationAddress. It means the destination address is unknown. Status 6: noRouteToTarget.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Remote Ping Chapter 1 Remote Ping Commands Parameter interval: Automatic test interval. It ranges from 0 to 65535 seconds and defaults to 0 meaning no automatic test. Description Use the frequency command to configure an automatic test interval. Use the undo frequency command to disable automatic test. The system automatically tests at intervals specified by this command, where the argument interval is greater than 0. Related command: count.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Remote Ping Chapter 1 Remote Ping Commands System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] remote ping administrator icmp [3Com-remote ping-administrator-icmp] 1.1.6 remote ping-agent enable Syntax remote ping-agent enable undo remote ping-agent enable View System view Parameter None Description Use the remote ping-agent enable command to enable the Remote Ping client function.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Remote Ping Chapter 1 Remote Ping Commands Description Use the test-enable command to execute an Remote Ping test. Use the undo test-enable command to disable an Remote Ping test. Note: After you execute the test-enable command, the system does not display the test result. You may view the test result information by executing the display remote ping command. Related command: display remote ping.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Remote Ping Chapter 1 Remote Ping Commands [3Com-remote ping-administrator-icmp] test-type icmp 1.1.9 timeout Syntax timeout time undo timeout View Remote Ping test group view Parameter time: Timeout time. It is in the range of 1 to 60 seconds and defaults to 3 seconds. Description Use the timeout command to configure a timeout time for a test. Use the undo timeout command to restore the default.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Hardware Commands Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 Hardware-Dependent Software Configuration Commands..................................... 1-1 1.1 Commands for Boot ROM Upgrade with App File............................................................. 1-1 1.1.1 boot bootrom default ............................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.2 boot bootrom file-url ....................................
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Hardware Commands Chapter 1 Hardware Configuration Comm ands Chapter 1 Hardware Configuration Commands 1.1 Commands for Boot ROM Upgrade with App File 1.1.1 boot bootrom default Syntax boot bootrom default [ slot slot-number-list ] View User view Parameter slot-number-list: Specifies a slot number list of the switch. slot-number-list = { slot-number [ to slot-number ] }&<1-N>.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Hardware Commands Chapter 1 Hardware Configuration Comm ands Description Use the boot bootrom file-url command to use the specified App file to upgrade the Boot ROMs. Example # Use the specified App file (abcd.app) to upgrade the Boot ROMs of all normal LPU boards in position. <3Com> boot bootrom abcd.app 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Hardware Commands Chapter 1 Hardware Configuration Comm ands Parameter auto: Sets the inter-card links are established in the auto negotiation mode. fix: Sets the inter-card links are established the fix mode. Description Use the set inlink command to set the mode in which inter-card links are established. By default, inter-card links are established in the auto negotiation mode. Example # Configure the inter-card links to be established in the fix mode.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Hardware Commands Chapter 1 Hardware Configuration Comm ands process, the SRPU can judge whether each service card in the device operates normally. You can also set the maximum number of times the SRPU fails to receive handshake packets. If the number of times the SRPU fails to receive handshake packets exceeds the upper limit, the switch resets the processing chip automatically.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Hardware Commands Chapter 1 Hardware Configuration Comm ands You can also set the maximum number of times the SRPU fails to receive handshake packets. If the number of times the SRPU fails to receive handshake packets exceeds the upper limit, the switch resets the processing chip automatically. When the SRPU receives handshake packets, it resets the counter automatically. Example # Set the upper limit to 50.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Hardware Commands Chapter 1 Hardware Configuration Comm ands <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Password Control Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 Password Control Configuration Commands.............................................................. 1 1.1 Password Control Configuration Commands ....................................................................... 1 1.1.1 display password-control............................................................................................ 1 1.1.2 display password-control blacklist..........
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Password Control Chapter 1 Password Control Configuration Commands Chapter 1 Password Control Configuration Commands 1.1 Password Control Configuration Commands 1.1.1 display password-control Syntax display password-control View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display password-control command to display the information about the global password control for all users.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Password Control Chapter 1 Password Control Configuration Commands Table 1-1 Description on the fields of the display password-control command Field Description Password Aging Password aging time Password Length Minimum password length Password history History password recording Password alert-before-expire Alert time before password expiration Password Authentication-timeout Timeout time authentication Password Attemp-failed action Number of
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Password Control Chapter 1 Password Control Configuration Commands 1.1.3 display password-control super Syntax display password-control super View Any view Parameter None Description Use the display password-control super command to display the information about the password control for super passwords, including the password aging time and the minimum password length. Example # Display the information about the password control for super passwords.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Password Control Chapter 1 Password Control Configuration Commands System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] local-user test New local user added. [3Com-luser-test] password Password:********** confirm:********** # Change the system login password for the user test to 0123456789. [3Com-luser-test]password Password:********** Confirm :********** Updating the password file ,please wait ... 1.1.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Password Control Chapter 1 Password Control Configuration Commands alert-time: Alert time period. When the remaining usable time of a password is no more than this time, the user is alerted to the forthcoming password expiration. It ranges from 1 day to 30 days and defaults to 7 days. authentication-timeout: Timeout time for user authentication. It ranges from 30 seconds to 120 seconds and defaults to 60 seconds.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Password Control Chapter 1 Password Control Configuration Commands # Configure the minimum password length of the system login passwords to eight characters. [3Com] password-control length 8 # Configure the number of password attempts allowed for each user to five. [3Com] password-control login-attempt 5 # Configure the maximum number of history password records allowed for each user to 10.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Password Control Chapter 1 Password Control Configuration Commands When the password used to log into the switch expires, the switch requires the user to change the password, and automatically saves the history (old) password to a file in the flash memory. In this way, the switch can prevent any user from using one single password or the used password for a long time to enhance the security.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Password Control Chapter 1 Password Control Configuration Commands Display the password control information of the specified user.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Password Control Chapter 1 Password Control Configuration Commands <3Com> system-view System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z. [3Com] password-control super aging 10 1.1.8 reset password-control history-record Syntax reset password-control history-record [ username username ] View User view Parameter username: Name of the user whose history password record will be deleted.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Password Control Chapter 1 Password Control Configuration Commands View User view Parameter level-value: Privilege level, the history records of the super password for the users at this level will be deleted. This value ranges from 1 to 3. Description Use the reset password-control history-record super level level-value command to delete the history records of the super password for the users at the specified level.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Password Control Chapter 1 Password Control Configuration Commands <3Com> display password-control blacklist USERNAME IP test 192.168.30.25 tes 192.168.30.24 test2 192.168.30.23 # Delete the user test from the blacklist. <3Com> reset password-control blacklist user-name test Are you sure to delete the All the blacklist users blacklist-users ?[Y/N]y have been cleared.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx Appendix A Command Index The command index includes an alphabetical listing of the commands for the 3Com Switch 7750.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx Command apply cost-type Routing Protocol Command 6-4 apply ip next-hop Routing Protocol Command 6-4 apply isis Routing Protocol Command 6-5 apply local-preference Routing Protocol Command 6-6 apply origin Routing Protocol Command 6-6 apply tag Routing Protocol Command 6-7 area Routing Protocol Command 3-2 area-authentication-mode Routing Protocol Command 4-1 arp check enable ARP Command 1-1
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx auto-build Cluster Command 1-16 auto-execute command Login Command 1-2 balance Routing Protocol Command 5-3 bgp Routing Protocol Command 5-3 binary FTP and TFTP Command 1-4 boot boot-loader System Maintenance and Debugging Command 3-1 boot boot-loader primary Hardware-dependent Software Configuration Command 1-2 boot bootrom System Maintenance and Debugging Command 3-2 boot bootrom default Sy
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx C c-bsr Multicast Command 5-2 cd SSH Terminal Service Command 1-26 cd File System Management Command 1-1 cd FTP and TFTP Command 1-6 cdup SSH Terminal Service Command 1-27 cdup FTP and TFTP Command 1-7 check region-configuration MSTP Command 1-2 checkzero Routing Protocol Command 2-1 clock datetime System Maintenance and Debugging Command 1-1 clock summer-time System Maintenance and Debugg
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx cost-style Routing Protocol Command 4-2 count Remote Ping Command 1-1 c-rp Multicast Command 5-3 crp-policy Multicast Command 5-4 cut connection AAA&RADIUS&HWTA CACS&EAD Command 1-3 dampening Routing Protocol Command 5-7 databits Login Command 1-3 data-flow-format AAA&RADIUS&HWTA CACS&EAD Command 1-26 data-flow-format AAA&RADIUS&HWTA CACS&EAD Command 1-54 debugging FTP and TFTP Command 1-
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx default-route-advertise Routing Protocol Command 4-3 delete SSH Terminal Service Command 1-28 delete File System Management Command 1-3 delete FTP and TFTP Command 1-9 delete static-routes all Routing Protocol Command 1-15 delete-member Cluster Command 1-21 description VLAN Command 1-2 description Port Basic Configuration Command 1-5 description Port Isolation Command 1-1 destination-ip Re
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx dhcp-server ip DHCP Command 2-7 dhcp-snooping DHCP Command 3-1 dhcp-snooping information enable DHCP Command 3-2 dhcp-snooping trust DHCP Command 3-1 dir SSH Terminal Service Command 1-28 dir File System Management Command 1-4 dir FTP and TFTP Command 1-10 disconnect FTP and TFTP Command 1-11 display acl config ACL Command 1-4 display acl config statistics ACL Command 1-5 display acl mod
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx display bgp routing-table cidr Routing Protocol Command 5-17 display bgp routing-table community Routing Protocol Command 5-18 display bgp routing-table community-list Routing Protocol Command 5-19 display bgp routing-table dampened Routing Protocol Command 5-20 display bgp routing-table different-origin-as Routing Protocol Command 5-21 display bgp routing-table flap-info Routing Protocol Command 5-2
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx display dhcp server expired DHCP Command 1-15 display dhcp server free-ip DHCP Command 1-16 display dhcp server ip-in-use DHCP Command 1-17 display dhcp server statistics DHCP Command 1-18 display dhcp server tree DHCP Command 1-20 display dhcp-security DHCP Command 2-7 display dhcp-security tracker DHCP Command 2-8 display dhcp-server DHCP Command 2-9 display dhcp-server interface DHCP Comma
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx display habp traffic 802.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx display ip socket IP Address&IP Performance&IPX Command 2-4 display ip statistics IP Address&IP Performance&IPX Command 2-6 display ipx interface IP Address&IP Performance&IPX Command 3-1 display ipx routing-table IP Address&IP Performance&IPX Command 3-3 display ipx service-table IP Address&IP Performance&IPX Command 3-5 display ipx statistics IP Address&IP Performance&IPX Command 3-7 display isis
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx display logbuffer Infomation Center Command 1-3 display logbuffer summary Infomation Center Command 1-6 display loopback-detection Port Basic Configuration Command 1-9 display mac-address MAC Address Table Command 1-2 display mac-address aging-time MAC Address Table Command 1-2 display mac-address multicast Multicast Command 3-1 display memory Routing Protocol Command 7-1 display memory System M
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx display ospf interface Routing Protocol Command 3-19 display ospf lsdb Routing Protocol Command 3-20 display ospf nexthop Routing Protocol Command 3-23 display ospf peer Routing Protocol Command 3-24 display ospf request-queue Routing Protocol Command 3-26 display ospf retrans-queue Routing Protocol Command 3-27 display ospf routing Routing Protocol Command 3-28 display ospf vlink Routing Protoc
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx display qos cos-local-precedence-map QoS Command 1-2 display qos-interface all QoS Command 1-2 display qos-interface line-rate QoS Command 1-3 display qos-interface mirrored-to Mirroring Command 1-2 display qos-interface queue-scheduler QoS Command 1-4 display qos-interface traffic-bandwidth QoS Command 1-6 display qos-interface traffic-limit QoS Command 1-6 display qos-interface traffic-priority
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx Command display snmp-agent SNMP&RMON Command 1-1 display snmp-agent community SNMP&RMON Command 1-1 display snmp-agent group SNMP&RMON Command 1-2 display snmp-agent mib-view SNMP&RMON Command 1-3 display snmp-agent statistics SNMP&RMON Command 1-5 display snmp-agent sys-info SNMP&RMON Command 1-6 display snmp-agent usm-user SNMP&RMON Command 1-7 display ssh server SSH Terminal Service Command
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx Command display trapbuffer Infomation Center Command 1-6 display udp statistics IP Address&IP Performance&IPX Command 2-11 display udp-helper server UDP-Helper Command 1-1 display uplink monitor System Maintenance and Debugging Command 3-9 display user-interface Login Command 1-3 display users Login Command 1-5 display users System Maintenance and Debugging Command 1-8 display version System Mai
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx dot1x authentication-method 802.1x Command 1-5 dot1x dhcp-launch 802.1x Command 1-6 dot1x guest-vlan 802.1x Command 1-7 dot1x max-user 802.1x Command 1-9 dot1x port-control 802.1x Command 1-10 dot1x port-method 802.1x Command 1-11 dot1x quiet-period 802.1x Command 1-12 dot1x re-authenticate 802.1x Command 1-13 dot1x retry 802.1x Command 1-14 dot1x retry-version-max 802.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx Command filter-policy import Routing Protocol Command 4-12 filter-policy import Routing Protocol Command 5-27 fixdisk File System Management Command 1-6 flow interval Port Basic Configuration Command 1-14 flow-control Login Command 1-6 flow-control Port Basic Configuration Command 1-13 flow-control enable Port Basic Configuration Command 1-13 format File System Management Command 1-7 free user
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx gvrp GVRP Command 1-7 gvrp registration GVRP Command 1-8 habp enable 802.1x Command 2-3 habp server vlan 802.1x Command 2-4 habp timer 802.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx Command igmp enable Multicast Command 4-3 igmp group-limit Multicast Command 4-4 igmp group-policy Multicast Command 4-5 igmp group-policy vlan Multicast Command 4-6 igmp host-join port Multicast Command 4-7 igmp host-join vlan Multicast Command 4-8 igmp lastmember-queryinterval Multicast Command 4-9 igmp max-response-time Multicast Command 4-10 igmp proxy Multicast Command 4-11 igmp report
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx info-center enable Infomation Center Command 1-9 info-center logbuffer Infomation Center Command 1-9 info-center loghost Infomation Center Command 1-10 info-center loghost source Infomation Center Command 1-12 info-center monitor channel Infomation Center Command 1-12 info-center snmp channel Infomation Center Command 1-13 info-center source Infomation Center Command 1-14 info-center timestamp I
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx Performance&IPX Command ipx encapsulation IP Address&IP Performance&IPX Command 3-10 ipx netbios-propagation IP Address&IP Performance&IPX Command 3-10 ipx network IP Address&IP Performance&IPX Command 3-11 ipx rip import-route static IP Address&IP Performance&IPX Command 3-12 ipx rip mtu IP Address&IP Performance&IPX Command 3-12 ipx rip multiplier IP Address&IP Performance&IPX Command 3-13 ipx rip
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx Performance&IPX Command ipx service IP Address&IP Performance&IPX Command 3-21 ipx split-horizon IP Address&IP Performance&IPX Command 3-23 ipx tick IP Address&IP Performance&IPX Command 3-23 ipx update-change-only IP Address&IP Performance&IPX Command 3-24 isis Routing Protocol Command 4-15 isis authentication-mode Routing Protocol Command 4-16 isis circuit-level Routing Protocol Command 4-18 is
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx Configuration Command K key AAA&RADIUS&HWTA CACS&EAD Command 1-31 key AAA&RADIUS&HWTA CACS&EAD Command 1-58 lacp enable Link Aggregation Command 1-6 lacp port-priority Link Aggregation Command 1-6 lacp system-priority Link Aggregation Command 1-7 language-mode System Maintenance and Debugging Command 1-4 lcd FTP and TFTP Command 1-14 level AAA&RADIUS&HWTA CACS&EAD Command 1-11 line-rate QoS C
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx Command loopback-detection interval-time Port Basic Configuration Command 1-18 ls SSH Terminal Service Command 1-31 ls FTP and TFTP Command 1-15 mac-address MAC Address Table Command 1-4 mac-address learning synchronization MAC Address Table Command 1-6 mac-address mac-learning disable MAC Address Table Command 1-6 mac-address max-mac-count MAC Address Table Command 1-7 mac-address multicast inte
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx mkdir SSH Terminal Service Command 1-31 mkdir File System Management Command 1-8 mkdir FTP and TFTP Command 1-16 modem Login Command 1-12 modem auto-answer Login Command 1-13 modem timer answer Login Command 1-14 monitor inner-channel Hardware-dependent Software Configuration Command 1-3 monitor inner-channel Hardware-dependent Software Configuration Command 1-4 monitor slot Hardware-dependen
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx CACS&EAD Command nbns-list DHCP Command 1-26 ndp enable Cluster Command 1-3 ndp timer aging Cluster Command 1-4 ndp timer hello Cluster Command 1-5 netbios-type DHCP Command 1-26 network Routing Protocol Command 2-9 network Routing Protocol Command 3-34 network Routing Protocol Command 5-29 network Traffic Accounting Command 1-5 network DHCP Command 1-27 network-entity Routing Protocol
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx ntp-service unicast-server NTP Command.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx Command peer advertise-community Routing Protocol Command 5-30 peer allow-as-loop Routing Protocol Command 5-31 peer as-number Routing Protocol Command 5-31 peer as-path-acl export Routing Protocol Command 5-32 peer as-path-acl import Routing Protocol Command 5-33 peer connect-interface Routing Protocol Command 5-33 peer default-route-advertise Routing Protocol Command 5-34 peer description Rout
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx Command peer-public-key end SSH Terminal Service Command 1-5 pim Multicast Command 5-10 pim bsr-boundary Multicast Command 5-11 pim dm Multicast Command 5-12 pim neighbor-limit Multicast Command 5-13 pim neighbor-policy Multicast Command 5-13 pim sm Multicast Command 5-14 pim timer hello Multicast Command 5-15 ping System Maintenance and Debugging Command 2-1 poe enable PoE Command 1-7 p
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx port isolate Port Isolation Command 1-3 port link-aggregation group Link Aggregation Command 1-9 port link-type Port Basic Configuration Command 1-23 port trunk permit vlan Port Basic Configuration Command 1-24 port trunk pvid vlan Port Basic Configuration Command 1-25 port-isolate group Port Isolation Command 1-4 preference Routing Protocol Command 2-11 preference Routing Protocol Command 3-47
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx public-key-code end SSH Terminal Service Command 1-8 public-key-code end SSH Terminal Service Command 1-19 put SSH Terminal Service Command 1-32 put FTP and TFTP Command 1-18 pwd SSH Terminal Service Command 1-32 pwd File System Management Command 1-10 pwd FTP and TFTP Command 1-19 qe monitor System Maintenance and Debugging Command 3-12 qe monitor errpkt System Maintenance and Debugging Comm
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx CACS&EAD Command radius-scheme AAA&RADIUS&HWTA CACS&EAD Command 1-16 raw-vlan-id inbound QinQ Command 2-1 rdram System Maintenance and Debugging Command 3-15 reboot System Maintenance and Debugging Command 3-15 reboot member Cluster Command 1-32 reflect between-clients Routing Protocol Command 5-48 reflector cluster-id Routing Protocol Command 5-49 refresh bgp Routing Protocol Command 5-50 reg
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx reset dhcp server ip-in-use DHCP Command 1-30 reset dhcp server statistics DHCP Command 1-30 reset dhcp-server DHCP Command 2-11 reset dhcp-snooping DHCP Command 3-5 reset dns dynamic-host DNS Command 1-7 reset dot1x statistics 802.
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx reset stop-accounting-buffer AAA&RADIUS&HWTA CACS&EAD Command 1-40 reset stop-accounting-buffer AAA&RADIUS&HWTA CACS&EAD Command 1-63 reset stp MSTP Command 1-8 reset tcp statistics IP Address&IP Performance&IPX Command 2-14 reset traffic-statistic QoS Command 1-20 reset trapbuffer Infomation Center Command 1-22 reset udp statistics IP Address&IP Performance&IPX Command 2-14 reset udp-helper pack
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx rmdir SSH Terminal Service Command 1-34 rmdir File System Management Command 1-13 rmdir FTP and TFTP Command 1-22 rmon alarm SNMP&RMON Command 2-9 rmon event SNMP&RMON Command 2-11 rmon history SNMP&RMON Command 2-12 rmon prialarm SNMP&RMON Command 2-13 rmon statistics SNMP&RMON Command 2-15 route-policy Routing Protocol Command 6-19 router id Routing Protocol Command 3-50 rsa local-key-
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx screen-length Login Command 1-16 secondary accounting AAA&RADIUS&HWTA CACS&EAD Command 1-44 secondary accounting AAA&RADIUS&HWTA CACS&EAD Command 1-65 secondary authentication AAA&RADIUS&HWTA CACS&EAD Command 1-45 secondary authentication AAA&RADIUS&HWTA CACS&EAD Command 1-66 secondary authorization AAA&RADIUS&HWTA CACS&EAD Command 1-67 security-policy-server AAA&RADIUS&HWTA CACS&EAD Command 2-1
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx slave auto-update config VRRP&HA Command 2-1 slave restart VRRP&HA Command 2-2 slave switchover VRRP&HA Command 2-2 slave update configuration VRRP&HA Command 2-3 snmp-agent SNMP&RMON Command 1-9 snmp-agent community Login Command 2-1 snmp-agent community SNMP&RMON Command 1-9 snmp-agent group Login Command 2-2 snmp-agent group SNMP&RMON Command 1-10 snmp-agent local-engineid SNMP&RMON Com
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx spf-delay-interval Routing Protocol Command 4-33 spf-schedule-interval Routing Protocol Command 3-52 spf-slice-size Routing Protocol Command 4-33 ssh authentication-type default SSH Terminal Service Command 1-12 ssh client assign rsa-key SSH Terminal Service Command 1-21 ssh client first-time enable SSH Terminal Service Command 1-22 ssh server authentication-retries SSH Terminal Service Command 1-
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx stp bridge-diameter MSTP Command 1-11 stp config-digest-snooping MSTP Command 1-12 stp cost MSTP Command 1-13 stp edged-port MSTP Command 1-14 stp interface MSTP Command 1-15 stp interface config-digest-snooping MSTP Command 1-16 stp interface cost MSTP Command 1-18 stp interface edged-port MSTP Command 1-19 stp interface loop-protection MSTP Command 1-20 stp interface mcheck MSTP Command
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx subvlan Extended VLAN Application Command 3-3 summary Routing Protocol Command 2-19 summary Routing Protocol Command 4-34 summary Routing Protocol Command 5-53 super CLI Command 1-2 super password CLI Command 1-3 supervlan Extended VLAN Application Command 3-4 sysname Login Command 1-22 sysname System Maintenance and Debugging Command 1-5 system-view System Maintenance and Debugging Comman
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx Command test-type Remote Ping Command 1-8 tftp cluster get Cluster Command 1-33 tftp cluster put Cluster Command 1-34 tftp get FTP and TFTP Command 1-24 tftp put FTP and TFTP Command 1-25 tftp-server Cluster Command 1-34 tftp-server acl FTP and TFTP Command 1-26 timeout Remote Ping Command 1-9 timer Routing Protocol Command 5-53 timer AAA&RADIUS&HWTA CACS&EAD Command 1-49 timer Cluster
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx traffic-group Traffic Accounting Command 1-8 traffic-limit QoS Command 1-26 traffic-priority QoS Command 1-28 traffic-red QoS Command 1-32 traffic-redirect QoS Command 1-33 traffic-remark-vlanid QoS Command 1-35 traffic-share-across-interface Routing Protocol Command 2-21 traffic-slot Traffic Accounting Command 1-8 traffic-statistic QoS Command 1-37 udp-helper port UDP-Helper Command 1-3
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx vlan all VLAN Command 1-10 vlan to VLAN Command 1-9 vlan-assignment-mode AAA&RADIUS&HWTA CACS&EAD Command 1-21 vlan-mapping modulo MSTP Command 1-47 vlan-vpn enable QinQ Command 1-1 vlan-vpn tunnel MSTP Command 1-48 vlan-vpn vid QinQ Command 2-2 vlink-peer Routing Protocol Command 3-54 voice vlan Extended VLAN Application Command 1-4 voice vlan aging Extended VLAN Application Command 1-5
3Com Switch 7750 Series Command Reference Guide – Command Index Appendix A Command Indexx A-45
